Yamaha RX-A1040 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Receptores AV
Tipo
El manual del propietario
English
AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
En 2
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FEATURES 6
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PREPARATIONS 14
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 38
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
PLAYBACK 54
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
En 3
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
CONFIGURATIONS 100
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 126
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 128
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
En 4
APPENDIX 133
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Accessories En 5
Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
AM antenna FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
YPAO microphone Wireless antenna
Power cable
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
Easy Setup Guide
Safety Brochure
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
Operating range of the remote control
Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model,
unless otherwise specified.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for
Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
Some features are not available in certain regions.
Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
30° 30°
Within
6 m (20 ft)
FEATURES What you can do with the unit En 6
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Speakers
BD/DVD player
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
TV remote control
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio
Audio/Video
TV
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
. p.147
Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
. p.38
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
. p.58
• Enjoying compressed music with
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
. p.62
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system
. p.20
iPod/iPhone/iPad
USB device
Audio
Network contents
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
. p.70
•USB
. p.73
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.76
• Internet radio
. p.80
•AirPlay
. p.83
3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported
AV receiver (the unit)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.55
Control
Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Smartphone/Tablet
Control
FEATURES What you can do with the unit En 7
Full of useful functions!
Connecting various devices (p.28)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
Various wireless connection methods
(p.46)
The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to
connect to your wireless router (access point) without a
network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct
enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
without router.
Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.58)
Connecting front presence speakers allows you to
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own
room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence
speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker
(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound.
Surround playback with 5 speakers placed
in front (p.60)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to
place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in
the front and enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the
5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).
Low power consumption (p.126)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption.
Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android™ device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the
Yamaha website for details.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
Wi-Fi or
Wireless Direct
Useful tips
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.99).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.114).
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.118).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
I want to get more bass sounds…
Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy
enhanced bass sounds (p.98).
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37).
I want to update the firmware...
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.131). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.132).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
Input settings (p.100)
SCENE settings (p.102)
Sound program and surround decoder settings
(p.105)
Various function settings (p.109)
Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.127)
System settings (p.129)
FEATURES Part names and functions En 8
Front panel
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
HDMI Control is enabled (p.117)
Standby Through is enabled (p.118)
Network Standby is enabled (p.119)
An iPod is being charged (p.70)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.10).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.62).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.9).
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
Part names and functions
INPUT
MAIN ZONE
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
52 3 41
6
8
7
Opening the front panel door
To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
FEATURES Part names and functions En 9
Inside of the front panel door
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.96).
B DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.95).
C TONE/BALANCE key
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.97).
Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2
(p.91).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.61).
E PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.57).
F SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.55).
G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2 Enables/disables the audio output to
Zone2 (p.90).
ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)
that is controlled by the keys and knobs
on the front panel (p.90).
H INFO (WPS) key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95).
Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push
button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.48).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.64).
J FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.63).
K PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.64).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.63).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod
(p.70).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.38).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.31, 32) or a smartphone (p.31).
OPTION
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
SCENE
1234
HDMI/
MHL
RLAUDIO
INFO(WPS)
MEMORY
FM AM
TUNING
PRESET
ENTER
5V 2.1A
5V 1A
9 A C D H I KE J LB0
M N O
FG
P
FEATURES Part names and functions En 10
Front display (indicators)
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
2 ECO
Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.126).
3 Signal strength indicator
Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.46).
4 ZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90).
5 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
6 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.95).
7 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
8 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
9 VIRTUAL
Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) or
the virtual surround processing (p.60) is working.
0 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62) is
working.
A STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
HD
(U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station
signal.
B CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.58) is working. “CINEMA
DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) is activated.
C PA RT Y
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91)
D Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
E ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.97) is working.
F Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
B Front presence speaker (L)
N Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
OUT
213
IN
VOLUME
MUTE
ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL
3
ZONE
ECO
2
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
FPL
CL R
FPR
ENHANCER
PARTY
STEREO TUNED
SLEEP
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
987
B
0 DFDC
1
6
5423
EA
FEATURES Part names and functions En 11
Rear panel
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.30).
2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
3 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
4 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.28), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88).
5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.35).
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
component/composite video jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component or
composite video and outputting video signals (p.27) or for
connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87).
7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.29).
8 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.28).
9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.36).
0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.89).
A NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.34).
B RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
C WIRELESS jack
For connecting the supplied wireless antenna (p.34).
D VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.36).
E AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36).
DC OUT
5V
0.5A
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV O UT
R
L
AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
HD Radio
OPTICAL
1
2
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
5
COAXIAL
6
L R R RL L L
SINGLE
AM
(4 RADIO)
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB YPRPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
Y
WIRELESS
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
21 4 A5 6 E9 : B783
DC
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES Part names and functions En 12
F ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.33).
G AUDIO 1–4 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.30).
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.35).
I ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.87).
J SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.15).
K PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or
to an external power amplifier (p.24).
DC OUT
5V
0.5A
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7
IN OUT
REMOTE
AV O UT
R
L
AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1
(1 BD/DVD)
OPTICAL
4
OPTICAL
3
COAXIAL
2
COAXIAL
1
PHONO
GND
AC IN
FM
75Ω
ANTENNA
HD Radio
OPTICAL
1
2
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
SPEAKERS
CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND
BI–AMP
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
R
5
COAXIAL
6
L R R RL L L
SINGLE
AM
(4 RADIO)
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
(SINGLE)
EXTRA SP
RS-232C
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
NETWORK
( 3
NET
)
Y
P
B PR
PRPB YPRPB
YPRPB
AV 1
COMPONENT VIDEO
A
AV 3
C
AV 2
B
Y
WIRELESS
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
JGF I KH
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
(U.S.A. model)
FEATURES Part names and functions En 13
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
2 z (receiver power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
3 Input selection keys
Select an input source for playback.
AV 17 AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
PHONO PHONO jacks
MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB USB jack (on the front panel)
NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select
a desired network source)
TUNER FM/AM radio
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.90).
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.55).
6 PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program (p.57).
7 External device operation keys
Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback
device (p.147).
8 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
9 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER Confirms a selected item.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72).
(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program
(p.65).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.63).
BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET Select a preset station.
TUNING Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is
selected as the input source, or control playback of the
HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.147).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.57).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.64).
F HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.54).
G PA RT Y k e y
Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).
H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
J OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.96).
K DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.95).
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
For information on the keys other than those above, refer to
“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
G
I
F
J
K
1
3
2
5
4
6
H
7
E
D
8
A
B
:
C
9
(U.S.A. model)
PREPARATIONS General setup procedure En 14
PREPARATIONS
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers (p.15)
Basic speaker configuration (p.16)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.20)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.
2 Connecting a TV (p.26)
Connect a TV to the unit.
3 Connecting playback devices (p.28)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.33)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
5
Connecting a network cable or the
wireless antenna (p.34)
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna
for establishing a wireless network connection.
6 Connecting other devices (p.35)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.36)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Selecting an on-screen menu language (
p.37
)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.38)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
10
Connecting to a network device wirelessly
(p.46)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 15
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20).
Functions of each speaker
We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.
However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.58).
Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
Ideal speaker layout
1 Connecting speakers
Caution
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).
Speaker type Abbr. Function
Front (L) 1
Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Front (R) 2
Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L) 4 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also
produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Surround (R) 5
Surround
back (L)
6
Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.
Surround
back (R)
7
Front
presence (L)
E
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP
3D (p.58), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional
sound field in your room.
Front
presence (R)
R
Subwoofer 9
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces
bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.
E
12
3
9
4
67
5
9
R
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
10°~30°10°~30°
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 16
Basic speaker configuration
Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
7.1+2-channel system
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.58).
7.1-channel system
(using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 17
5.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying
5.1-channel contents.
Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)
Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual
surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual
CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (
p.113
) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.
You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).
Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
2.1-channel system
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
1
2
39
ER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 18
Setting the speaker impedance
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a
6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6 MIN”. In this case,
you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
3
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “6 MIN”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
Speakers to be connected
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front
presence speakers (*2).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.24).
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
8MIN
SPEAKERIMP.
Caution
Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Room Speaker type Abbr.
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Power Amp
Assign
(p.111)
7+2 7 5 2
Main zone
Front (L) 1 ●●●●
Basic (default)
Front (R) 2 ●●●●
Center 3 ●●●
Surround (L) 4 ●●*3
Surround (R) 5 ●●*3
Surround
back (L)
6 *1
Surround
back (R)
7 *1
Front
presence (L)
E *2 *4
Front
presence (R)
R *2 *4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 19
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
+
+
1
67
2
3
45
9
9
ER
The unit (rear)
FRONT
-
+
aa
b
d
c
+ (red)
– (black)
FRONT
+
a
b
Banana plug
(
SINGLE
)
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
CENTER
SUR. BACKSURRUND
1
2
FRONT
Audio pin cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 20
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
(Example) (Example) (Example)
Bi-amp
connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
External power
amplifier
Main zone
Zone2
Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 21
Available speaker configurations
When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111)
in the “Setup” menu.
5ch BI-AMP
Main zone
Multi-zone
Power Amp Assign
(p.111)
Page
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
External
power
amplifier
(required)
5 5ch BI-AMP 21
7
Surround
back
5ch BI-AMP +SB 22
7 +1 (Zone2) 7ch +1ZONE 22
1
3
45
99
2
Bi-amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 (not used)
ER (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1–2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 22
5ch BI-AMP +SB 7ch +1ZONE
1
3
45
6
99
7
2
Bi-amp
via external amp
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
ER (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1–2
21
12
3
4
6
99
7
5
Main zone
Zone2
When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
Speaker Connect to
12 FRONT
3 CENTER
45 SURROUND
67 SURROUND BACK
ER (not used)
9 SUBWOOFER 1–2
Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 23
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the
“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.
Connecting Zone2 speakers
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87).
Caution
Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
12
3
9
45
9
The unit (rear)
12
3
45
76
99
The unit (rear)
Main zone
Zone2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting speakers En 24
Connecting an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the
input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel
signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
1 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
2 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
3 SUR. BACK jacks
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
With unbalanced inputs
With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )
Caution
To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.
1 2 34
The unit (rear)
MAIN IN
PR
SU
R
FRONT
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
Main input jack
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S3000)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Input/output jacks and cables En 25
Video/audio jacks
HDMI jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission
features.
Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.
HDMI/MHL jack
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
or HDMI cable.
The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
MHL and HDMI connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. For details on an MHL
connection, see “MHL connection” (p.31). When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable.
Video jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P
B),
and chrominance red (P
R). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
VIDEO jacks
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
Audio jacks
OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
COAXIAL jacks
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
AUDIO jacks
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
Input/output jacks and cables
AV 1
HDMI cable
MHL or HDMI cable
COMPONEN
AV 1
A
Component video cable
AV 1
Video pin cable
Digital optical cable
Digital coaxial cable
Stereo pin cable
PREPARATIONS Connecting a TV En 26
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI
cable.
HDMI connection
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.28).
You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:
If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)
If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box
If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control.
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For
details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.147).
Component/composite video connection
When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to
the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.
If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable
connection between the TV and the unit.
2 Connecting a TV
HDMI
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
HDMI
OO
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT jack
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
HDMI input
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a
single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting a TV En 27
COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB PR
MONITOR
OUT
Y
OO
L
R
L
R
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit
(rear)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video input
(component video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
OPTICAL
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
5
AUDIO
OPTICAL
R
L
VIDEO
ZONE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
OO
L
R
L
R
V
V
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
Video input (composite video)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
TV
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting playback devices En 28
Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.54).
HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88).
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
Connecting an iPod (p.70)
Connecting a USB storage device (p.73)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.146).
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),
COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu.
HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
HDMI
HDMI OUT
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
12
HDMI
HDMI
The unit
(rear)
HDMI OUT 2 jack
HDMI input
Projector
TV (already connected)
TV
3 Connecting playback devices
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI output
Video device
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting playback devices En 29
Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Composite video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Component video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
YP
B
P
R
YP
B
P
R
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
P
R
P
B
Y
P
R
P
B
Y
The unit (rear)
AV 1–3
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(component video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
V
V
The unit (rear)
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
Video output
(composite video)
Video device
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting playback devices En 30
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)
Turntable (PHONO) PHONO
When connecting a turntable
The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
R
L
PHONO
GND
R
L
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
R
L
PHONO
GND
CC
L
R
L
R
OO
L
R
L
R
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks
The unit
(rear)
Audio device
PHONO jacks
Audio output
(PHONO)
Turntable
Ground lead
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting playback devices En 31
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73).
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.
HDMI connection
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26).
You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from
the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in
“Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu.
MHL connection
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input
videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26).
You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.
If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.
You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
If “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
The unit is turned on.
The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
PROGRAM
HDMI/
MHL
RLAUDIO
FM AM
TUNING
ENTER
5V 2.1A
5V 1A
HDMI
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
PROGRAM
HDMI/
MHL
RLAUDIO
FM AM
TUNING
ENTER
5V 2.1A
5V 1A
MHL
MHL
Mobile device
MHL output
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting playback devices En 32
Composite video/analog stereo connection
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack.
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI ZONE
VIDEO AUX
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
PROGRAM
HDMI/
MHL
RLAUDIO
FM AM
TUNING
ENTER
5V 2.1A
5V 1A
V RL
Game console
Camcorder
The unit (front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 33
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
Assembling the AM antenna
Connecting the AM antenna
Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.
FM antenna
AM antenna
The unit (rear)
Hold down Insert Release
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna En 34
Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the
supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Connecting the network cable
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.119).
You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.
Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
Connecting the wireless antenna
Connect the supplied wireless antenna to the unit for establishing a wireless network
connection.
For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see
“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.46).
a Rotate the antenna clockwise.
b Stand the antenna up straight.
Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one.
Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.
When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage.
5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna
LAN
WAN
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
Internet
Modem
Router
Network cable
PC
The unit (rear)
Mobile device
(such as iPod touch
and iPhone)
a
b
WIRELESS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting other devices En 35
Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.
The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output
You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
6 Connecting other devices
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
AV OUT
R
L
V
L
R
L
R
OO
V
The unit (rear)
AV OUT jacks
Video/audio input
Video/audio
recording device
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
SURROUND SUR. BACK
L
R
L
R
L
R
The unit (rear)
MULTI CH
INPUT jacks
Channel output
(Center)
Device with analog
multi-channel output
(Subwoofer)
(Surround
back)
(Surround)
(Front)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting the power cable En 36
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.
You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.124) in the
“Setup” menu.
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
TRIGGER
OUT
1
2
12V 0.1A
MAX. TOTAL
The unit (rear)
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
System connection
input
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V-
240V
110V-
120V
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
To an AC wall outlet
The unit (rear)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Selecting an on-screen menu language En 37
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
z
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.
Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.
Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.
Keep the room as quiet as possible.
Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not
become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.
Do not connect headphones.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
4
According to your speaker configuration, configure
the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the
“Setup” menu.
For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic”
(default).
For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set
to the appropriate setting.
5
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the
front panel.
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
VOLUME HIGH CUT
CROSSOVER/
MIN MAXMIN MAX
9
YPAO MIC
9
12
3
45
The unit (front)
YPAO
microphone
Ear height
YPAO MIC
jack
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
z
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39
The following screen appears on the TV.
To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
6
If desired, change the measuring method
(multi/single).
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Settings
If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.41)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.40)
Yes
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions
(multi measure).
No (default)
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
a b
a
a
b
c
d
e
c
d
de
bac
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
Multi measure
(2 listening positions + front/back)
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)
Single measure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the
measurement.
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45).
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.43).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
3
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the
“Option” menu.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41
5
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening
positions.
If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45).
1
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42
3
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.43).
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”
to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.
If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are
automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy
natural sounds even at low volume.
You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the
“Option” menu.
7
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Caution
The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43
Checking the measurement results
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
1
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
The following screen appears.
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
3
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
1
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.108).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker
Level Output level adjustment for each speaker
1
2
3
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4:SBR SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6:Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
E-10:Internal Err. An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.43) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
If the speaker is connected correctly:
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2:Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.43) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m
(80 ft) of the listening position.
W-3:Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Select “Level” in “Result” (p.43) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage
environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend
using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 46
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a
wireless connection.
Selecting the connection method
Select a connection method according to your network environment.
Connecting with a wireless router (access point)
Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).
You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47).
You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection
(p.34) or Wireless Direct (p.52).
If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless
router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.
Connecting without a wireless router (access point)
Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.
You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the
unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.
For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly
(Wireless Direct)” (p.52).
You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.34) or the
wireless network connection (p.47).
When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.
Internet radio
–Network services
Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)
For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.
10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly
The unit
Wireless router
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
Internet
Modem
The unit
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 47
Connecting the unit to a wireless network
There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless
network.
Select a connection method according to your environment.
A: Sharing the iOS device setting
You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the
connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).
Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a
wireless router.
You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see
“Supported devices and file formats” (p.145).
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.
Yes
Do you own iOS devices
(iPhone/iPad/iPod touch)?
Yes
A (p.47)
B (p.48)
Does your wireless router
(access point) has a WPS
button?
C (p.49)
No
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 48
9
Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable
the screen lock on the iOS device.
10
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and
press ENTER.
11
Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS
device.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
12
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
B: Using the WPS push button
configuration
You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the
WPS button.
This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router
(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3
seconds.
“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front
display.
3
Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access
point).
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the front display.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
DISPLAY
RETURN
VIDEO AUX
ZONE
2
ZONE
CONTROL
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
RLAUDIO
5V 2.1A
The unit (front)
About WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,
which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 49
C: Using other connection methods
If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push
button configuration method, follow the procedure below to
configure the wireless network settings.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the
desired connection method and select “NEXT”.
The following connection methods are available.
WPS Button
You can set up a wireless connection with the
WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow
the instructions displayed on the TV screen.
Share Wi-Fi
Settings (iOS)
See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.47).
Access Point
Scan
You can set up a wireless connection by
searching for an access point. For details on
settings, see “Searching for an access point”
(p.50).
Manual Setting
You can setup a wireless connection by entering
the required information (such as SSID)
manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up
the wireless connection manually” (p.50).
PIN Code
You can set up a wireless connection by entering
the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point). The method is available if the
wireless router (access point) supports the WPS
PIN code method. For details on settings, see
“Using the PIN code” (p.51).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 50
Searching for an access point
If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the
unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Setting up the wireless connection manually
If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the
wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.
You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method
and security key for your network.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of
the access point and select “NEXT”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
security method of the access point and select
“NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES),
Mixed Mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 51
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 4.
If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or
10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.
If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character
string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is
entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Using the PIN code
If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of
available access points appears on the TV screen.
1
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the
desired access point and select “NEXT”.
The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.
2
Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router
(access point).
For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the
wireless router (access point).
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”
and press ENTER to start the connection process.
When the connection process finishes, “Completed”
appears on the TV screen.
If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try
another connection method.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 52
Connecting a mobile device to the unit
directly (Wireless Direct)
Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit
directly.
Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not
strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless
devices connected to the unit without permission.
1
Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.
2
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI.
3
Press ON SCREEN.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.
6
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network
Connection” and press ENTER.
7
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check
“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.
The checkmark indicates the current setting.
8
Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the
desired security method and select “NEXT”.
Settings
None, WEP
If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the
communication is not encrypted.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PREPARATIONS Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 53
9
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the
security key and select “NEXT”.
If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.
Proceed to Step 10.
Otherwise, enter either 5 or 13 character string.
10
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press
ENTER to save the setting.
The settings made appear on the TV screen.
The SSID and security key information is required for setup
of a mobile device.
11
Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.
For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the
instruction manual of the mobile device.
a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.
b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available
access points.
c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key
displayed in Step 10.
12
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure En 54
PLAYBACK
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63)
Playing back iPod music (p.70)
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.73)
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.76)
Listening to Internet radio (p.80)
Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)
4
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.97).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.55).
When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122)), you
can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Basic playback procedure
OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
OUT1+2
HDMIOUTSel.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
ON SCREEN
ENTER
VOLUME
MUTE
HDMI OUT
Cursor keys
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 55
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
1
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.102).
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)
Input
Input (p.54) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER
Audio Select (p.99) Auto Auto
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.54) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2
Mode
Sound Program (p.57) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.115) Auto Auto Auto Auto
Enhancer (p.62) Off On On On
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
TV
BD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ON SCREEN
ENTER
SCENE
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 56
Configuring scene assignments
1
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of
the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details,
refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SETComplete
SCENE1
Sound
Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,
Extra Bass
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround
Video Video Mode
Vol ume Master Volume
Lipsync Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
TV
BD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
SCENE
PLAYBACK Selecting the sound mode En 57
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
Press MOVIE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.58).
Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
Press MUSIC repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.59).
Selecting a surround decoder
Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.61).
Switching to the straight decode mode
Press STRAIGHT.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.61).
Switching to the Pure Direct mode
Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.62).
Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.62).
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.104).
The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.61) is automatically selected.
You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.126).
Selecting the sound mode
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
INF
O
S
LEE
P
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TV
BD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1 2
3
4
1
2
3
4
US
B
N
ET
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
ON SCREEN
ENTER
PROGRAM
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Selecting the sound mode En 58
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual
movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound
fields.
To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.
We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic
sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual
Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound
fields. When VPS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
MOVIE THEATER
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PAR TY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
HallinVienna
CLASSICAL
MUSIC
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
Sound program category
Sound program
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
PLAYBACK Selecting the sound mode En 59
ENTERTAINMENT
Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
STEREO
CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.60) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
PLAYBACK Selecting the sound mode En 60
Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no
surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround
technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using
presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.
When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in
front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)
If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your
room, you can place them in the front (p.17) and enjoy multi-channel surround sound
using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.
When “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates
the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel
surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.
When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with
stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting
a sound program or a surround decoder.
PLAYBACK Selecting the sound mode En 61
Enjoying unprocessed playback
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
1
Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu to
a setting other than “Off”.
If “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual
CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works when multi-channel source is played back.
Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.142).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
STRAIGHT
bPro Logic
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
bPLIIx Movie
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
bPLII Music
bPLIIx Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
bPLII Game
Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ProLogic
SUR.DECODE
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
US
B
N
ET
STRAIGHT
SUR.DECODE
PLAYBACK Selecting the sound mode En 62
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
1
Press PURE DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu
Using the multi-zone function
Output from the AV OUT jacks
Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
1
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
You can also use “Enhancer” (p.98) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
PUREDIRECT
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
ENHANCER
EnhancerOn
“ENHANCER” lights up
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1 2 3
4
M
O
VI
E
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NE
T
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1 2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
PURE DIRECT
ENHANCER
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 63
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
Setting the frequency steps
(Asia and General models only)
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
Selecting a frequency for reception
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
3
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
“Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
(U.S.A. model only)
You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “Audio Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the
monaural reception mode.)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
Listening to FM/AM radio
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
3
ZONE
2
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM50/AM9
TUNERFRQSTEP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CLR
PR
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM87.50MHz
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
FM98.50MHz
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
PRE
S
ET
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
TUNING
BAND
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 64
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD
Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.67, p.69).
Registering a radio station
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
1
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.63)
to tune into the desired radio station.
(U.S.A. model only)
To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.65)
after tuning into the radio station.
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
Selecting a preset station
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
“Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
“Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.67, p.69).
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
PresetOK
Preset
01:FM98.50MHz
Preset number
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
FM98.50MHz
Preset
01:Empty
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
SBL SBRSB
SL
SW
SR
CL R
VOLUME
TUNEDSTEREO
Preset
01:FM98.50MHz
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
MEMORY
PRESET
TUNER
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 65
HD Radio™ tuning
(U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting
provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and
reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental
program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio
programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio Technology, visit
“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating
CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM
broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data
(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)
from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
When tuning into an HD Radio station
The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If
you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down
TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.
When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.99), you can tune into the
analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.
Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program
You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD
Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).
1
Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio
program.
You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)
directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select
program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).
Displaying the HD Radio™ information
You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station
or period of time.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience
of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,
HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.
These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as
deep cuts into traditional genre.
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s
FM and FM sounds like a CD.
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
TUNED
HD
WXYZ-FM
FM88.9MHz1
HD1/3
Relative/total program number
(when multiple programs are available)
“HD” lights up Absolute program number
(when multiple programs are available)
Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign)
Category Station name (call sign), program category
Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title
Album Station name (call sign), album title
DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit
Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
TUNED
HD
WXYZ-FM
FM88.9MHz3
HD2/3
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
TUNED
HD
Category
Info
Item name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
TUNED
HD
RhythmandBlu
WXYZ-FM
FM88.9-1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENT
MODE
INFO
TUNING
Numeric keys
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 66
HD Radio™ operation on the TV
You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on
the TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program
number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program
category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
2 HD indicator
Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
1
3
4
2
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
FM
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Program (+/-)
Selects an audio program (when
multiple audio programs are
available).
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 67
Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1
(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,
register it manually (p.64).
Radio Data System tuning
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
Displaying the Radio Data System information
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.69).
2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers HD Radio
(FM/AM) stations and FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
Program Service Program service name
Program Type Current program type
Radio Text Information on the current program
Clock Time Current time
DSP Program Sound mode name
Audio Decoder Decoder name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
ProgramType
Info
Item name
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
CLASSICS
FM98.50MHz
Information
Frequency (always displayed)
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
INFO
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 68
“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
Receiving traffic information
automatically
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
To cancel the search, press RETURN.
Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
“TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
Operating the radio on the TV
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playback screen
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
VOLUME
SBL SBR
SL
SW
SR
CL R
STEREO TUNED
TPFM101.30MHz
TrafficProgram
Finished
Traffic information station (frequency)
(U.S.A. model only)
See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.66) to operate the radio on the TV.
2
1
3
4
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
TUNER
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Listening to FM/AM radio En 69
Browse screen
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
Menu Submenu Function
Manual Tuning
FM
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct Enters a frequency directly.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
Menu Submenu Function
Utility
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
1 Page Down
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
3
2
1
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Playing back iPod music En 70
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.145).
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
1
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
2
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
Playback of iPod content
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.72).
Playing back iPod music
OPTION
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
RETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
ENTER
5V 2.1A
The unit (front)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Connected
USB
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
USB
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Playing back iPod music En 71
Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK Playing back iPod music En 72
Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys Select an item.
ENTER Confirms the selection.
RETURN Returns to the previous screen.
External device
operation keys
a
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
d
s Stops playback.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
h
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
j
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
x” appears in the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
v” appears in the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
MODE
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 73
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”
(p.145).
Connecting a USB storage device
1
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
OPTION
ON
SCREEN
DISPLAY
RETURN
YPAO MIC
PHONES
SILENT CINEMA
TONE/BALANCE
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
ENTER
5V 2.1A
The unit (front)
USB storage device
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
Connected
USB
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
N
ET
USB
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 74
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 75
Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 76
You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.34). You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.127) in the “Information” menu.
The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired
network connection.
For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145).
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to
configure the media sharing setting on each music server.
For a PC with Windows Media Player installed
For Windows Media Player 12
1
Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.
2
Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.
3
Click “Turn on media streaming”.
4
Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model
name.
5
Click “OK” to exit.
For Windows Media Player 11
1
Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
2
Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.
3
Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click
“Allow”.
4
Click “OK” to exit.
For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.
For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software
installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media
sharing settings.
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 77
Playback of PC music contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 78
Browse screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Playback screen
1 Status indicators
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.101).
Menu Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
s Stops playback.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 79
Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Item Setting Function
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
x” appears on the TV screen.
Repeat
(Repeat)
Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
v” appears on the TV screen.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Listening to Internet radio En 80
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.34). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.
You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
This service may be discontinued without notice.
Playback of Internet radio
1
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Listening to Internet radio
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
ENTER
RETURN
NET
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Listening to Internet radio En 81
Browse screen
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
3 Contents list
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
Some information may not be available depending on the station.
Menu Function
Bookmark On
(Bookmark Off)
Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from
the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82).
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
1
5
3
2
4
Menu Submenu Function
Bookmark On
Adds the current station to the
“Bookmarks” folder (p.82).
Play Control s Stops playback.
Browse Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1
3
2
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK Listening to Internet radio En 82
Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)
By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,
you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the
browse screen.
Registering the station on the
browse/playback screen
1
Select the desired Internet radio station in the
browse screen or start playback of it to display the
playback screen.
2
Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”
and press ENTER.
The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.
To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the
“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.
Registering the station on the vTuner
website
1
Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.
This operation is necessary to register the radio station for
the first time.
2
Check the vTuner ID of the unit.
You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.
3
Access the vTuner website
(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on
your PC and enter the vTuner ID.
To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your
account using your e-mail address.
4
Register your favorite radio stations.
Click the “Add” icon (
+) next to the station name.
To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in
the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (
–) next to the station
name.
You can switch the language.
Enter the vTuner ID in this area.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
Cursor keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music with AirPlay En 83
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.
To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check
whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”
(p.127) in the “Information” menu.
When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to
connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145).
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.
1
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback
screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.
If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.
2
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit
(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Playing back music with AirPlay
PC
iTunes
Router
(wired or wireless)
iPhone/iPad/
iPod touch
The unit
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
iTunes (example) iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
PLAYBACK Playing back music with AirPlay En 84
You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu.
If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.101) in the “Input”
menu to “Off”.
Playback screen
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
Caution
When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
1
3
2
Menu Submenu Function
Play Control
a Resumes playback from pause.
d Stops playback temporarily.
f
Skips forward/backward.
g
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
iTunes (example of English version)
Check this box
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
DI
S
PL
A
Y
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
RETURN
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
External device
operation keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room
where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person
can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
Multi-zone configuration examples
Enjoying music in another room
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87
Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To
enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of
the unit.
Enjoying videos/music in another room
You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.
Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.87
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87
Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to
Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog
video/audio jacks of the unit.
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in
Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147).
Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that
you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone
connections that best meet your requirements.
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Audio
(SPEAKERS or
ZONE OUT)
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Audio
(SPEAKERS or
ZONE OUT)
Video
(ZONE OUT)
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 86
Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Connection
TV: p.88
Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in
Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of the unit.
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
Connecting speakers to play back audio
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies
depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).
Using the unit’s internal amplifier
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see
“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23).
Living room (main zone)
Study room
(Zone2)
Video/audio
(HDMI)
Caution
Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external
amplifier.
Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 87
Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a
stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.
Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video
input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection
methods.
The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch
videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to
the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD
player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor
Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
ZONE OUT
ZONE 2
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2) jacks
Zone2
Main zone
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
YPB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
P
B
P
R
ZONE OUT
MONITOR
OUT
Y
V
V
PR
PB
Y
P
R
PB
Y
The unit (rear)
ZONE OUT jacks
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)
Zone2
Main zone
Video input
(component video or
composite video)
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 88
Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at
Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another
room (Zone2).
To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit
with an HDMI cable (p.28).
We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.
On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”
(p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI OUT
(ZONE OUT)
2
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
The unit (rear)
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
Zone2
Main zone
HDMI input
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
Zone2
Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is
performed.
Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 89
Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)
You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control
supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for
each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.
Remote connections between Yamaha products
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that
support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals
by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
IN OUT
REMOTE
The unit (rear)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
(supplied with each device)
Infrared signal
receiver
Zone2
Main zone
Infrared signal
transmitter
IN
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
REMOTE
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Zone2
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 90
Controlling Zone2
1
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
2
Press z (receiver power).
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front
display.
3
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you
connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.147).
You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
4
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63)
Playing back iPod music (p.70)
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.73)
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.76)
Listening to Internet radio (p.80)
Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)
The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display
or web control (p.92) to control Zone2.
AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
Caution
To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
E
N
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
MAIN/ZONE2
z
Input selection keys
PLAYBACK Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91
Other operations for Zone2
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
Adjusting the volume
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display.
Setting the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the
following functions are not available.
Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance
Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene
Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
1
Press PARTY.
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.122) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2
output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
PR
OG
RAM
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
MUSI
C
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
TV
BD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
SCENE
PARTY
PLAYBACK Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 92
You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.
To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.
Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these
cases, configure the security software appropriately.
To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby
mode, set “Network Standby” (p.94) to “On”.
We recommend using one of the following web browsers.
– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x
– Safari 6.x
1
Start the web browser.
2
Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.
(Example)
You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu.
You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.94) to access the
web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of
the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.
If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.119), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC
to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,
refer to its instruction manual.
If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.
– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the
screen.
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details.
Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)
Web browser
Web control
PC
Router The unit
Web control
PLAYBACK Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 93
Top menu screen
1 CONTROL
Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.
2 STATUS
Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.
3 SETTINGS
Moves to the settings screen.
4 PA RT Y M ODE
Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).
5 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on/off the power for all zones.
6 MAIN VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
7 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Control screen
1 PLAY INFO
Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.
2 TOP MENU
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 SCENE
Selects a scene for the selected zone.
4 POWER
Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.
5 VOLUME
Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the
increments used for volume adjustment.
6 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
2
1
4
3
5
6
PLAYBACK Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 94
Settings screen
1 Rename
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120) or the name of each zone
(p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Network
Selects the network connection method (p.119) or configures the network parameters (such as
IP address) (p.119). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
MAC Filter
Sets the MAC address filter (p.119) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click
“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.
Auto Reload
Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control
screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.
Network Standby
Enables/disables the network standby function (p.119).
Backup/Recovery
Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.
Firmware Update
Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.
Create Link
Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.
Tips
Displays tips for use of the web control.
2 BACK
Moves to the top menu screen.
3 RELOAD
Reloads the current status of the unit.
2
1
3
Note
If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.
When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network
devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and
other external devices.
Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the
settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.
The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific
information (such as MAC address and IP address).
Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.
PLAYBACK Viewing the current status En 95
Switching information on the front display
1
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Viewing the status information on the TV
1
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
Viewing the current status
Input source group Item
AV 17
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
* (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned
into an HD Radio station (p.65).
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (
p.67
).
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
AudioDecoder
Info
Item name
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ProLogic
AV1
Information
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
NET RADIO
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Input source group Item
Input source/
Party mode
status
Audio format/
Decoder
Compressed Music Enhancer status
CINEMA DSP status
Sound
mode
Volume/
YPAO
Volume
status
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
RETURN
ENTE
R
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
INFO
DISPLAY
PLAYBACK Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 96
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Front display
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Option menu items
Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
Default settings are underlined.
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
SLEEP
HD
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
ToneControl
Option
Item Function Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
97
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Volume)
YPAO Volume
(YPAO Vol.)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 97
Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
97
Dialogue
(Dialog)
Dialogue Level
(Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 98
Dialogue Lift
(Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 98
Subwoofer/Bass
(Subwoofer/Bass)
Subwoofer Trim
(SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 98
Extra Bass
(Extra Bass)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. 98
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 98
Video Processing
(Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
99
Input Settings
(Input Settings)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
Corrects volume differences between input sources. 99
Audio Select
(A.Sel)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
99
Video Out
(V.Out)
Selects a video to be output with the audio input
source.
99
Audio Mode
(Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM
radio reception.
99
PLAYBACK Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 97
Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass
(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)
Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.
Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and
low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that
you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.
Settings
YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already
saved (p.38).
We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower
volumes or at night.
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically
adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for
listening to playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide
at a high volume.
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
99
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
68
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72),
USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72),
USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).
Item Function Page
YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)
Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.
On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.
Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)
Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is
enabled.
Volume: low Volume: high
Input level Input level
On
Off
On
Off
Output level
Output level
PLAYBACK Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 98
Dialogue (Dialog)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard
clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0
to 3
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing
this setting.
This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front
presence speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
Setting range
0
to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)
Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy
enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the
presence or absence of the subwoofer.
Settings
Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62).
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.62).
Settings
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Ideal position
Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Extra Bass (Extra Bass)
Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.
On (On) Enables Extra Bass.
Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
PLAYBACK Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99
Video Processing (Video Process.)
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
Input Settings (Input Settings)
Configures the input settings.
This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made
for one input source.
Settings
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Settings
Default
USB: V-AUX (V-AUX)
Others: Off (Off)
Audio Mode (Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.
This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).
Settings
HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.
FM Mode (FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Direct
(Direct) Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Input Trim (In.Trim)
Audio Select (A.Sel)
Auto (Auto)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.
Video Out (V.Out)
Off (Off) Does not output video.
AV 1–7 (AV1–7),
V-AUX (V-AUX)
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Auto
(Auto)
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the
signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.
Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.
Stereo
(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 100
CONFIGURATIONS
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
The input source of the unit also changes.
You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Default settings are underlined.
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
Item Function Page
Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 101
Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 101
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
101
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
101
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 101
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
4
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable
Allows DMCs to control playback.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 102
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.55) using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
5
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Scene menu items
Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.56).
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
Item Function Page
Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 102
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
103
Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 104
Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 104
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 103
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected
to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set
“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147).
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the
settings currently assigned to the selected scene.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item
and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio
with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)
and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
Choices
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
Device Control
Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Detail
Input Input (p.54), Audio Select (p.99)
HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.54)
Mode Sound Program (p.57), Pure Direct Mode (p.115), Enhancer (p.62)
Sound
Tone Control (p.97), YPAO Volume (p.97), Adaptive DRC (p.97),
Extra Bass (p.98)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.115), Dialogue Lift (p.98), Dialogue Level
(p.98), Subwoofer Trim (p.98), Extended Surround (p.116)
Video Video Mode (p.116)
Volume Master Volume (p.54)
Lipsync Lipsync (p.114), Delay (p.115)
Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.111), PEQ Select (p.113)
Check or uncheck
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 104
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Reset
Restores the default settings (p.55) for the selected scene.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 105
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Sound Program menu items
Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
Default settings are underlined.
Settings for sound programs
Item Function Settings
Decode Type
Selects a surround decoder to be used
in combination with the selected sound
program.
bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie
(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx
Music* (bPLII Music*),
bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music*
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6
dB
to 0
dB
to +3
dB
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
1ms to 49ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 106
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
Item Function Settings
Sound program
Item Function Settings
2ch Stereo Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto
, Off
7ch Stereo
Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0
to +5
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the left and right
volume balance.
-5 to 0
to +5
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the front
presence speakers.
0 to 5
to 10
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
front presence speakers do
not produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off
, On
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 107
Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type Item Function Settings
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off
, On
Select “On” to wrap front left/right
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 3
to 7
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to 0
to +3
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Neo:6 Music Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 0.3
to 1.0
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109
Setup menu items
Menu Item Function Page
Speaker
Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 38
Manual Setup
Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 111
Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 111
Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 111
Configuration
Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 112
Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 112
Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 112
Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 112
Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 112
Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 113
Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 113
Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 113
Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 113
Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 113
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 113
Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 114
Sound
Lipsync
Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 114
Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 114
Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 115
Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 115
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 115
Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 115
Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 115
Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 115
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 115
Extended Surround Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 116
Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 116
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110
HDMI
HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 117
Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 118
Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 118
Network
Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 119
IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 119
Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 119
MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 119
Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 120
Multi Zone
Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 121
Zone2 Set
Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 121
Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 121
Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 121
Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 122
Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 122
Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 122
Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 122
HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 122
Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 122
Function
Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 123
Display Set
Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 123
Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 123
Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 123
Trigger Output1
Trigger Output2
Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 124
Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 124
DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 124
Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 125
ECO
Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 125
ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 126
Language Select an on-screen menu language. 126
Menu Item Function Page
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.
Default settings are underlined.
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
Measurement results (Auto Setup)
Power Amp Assign
Configuration
Distance
Level
Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1
, Pattern2
The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.
This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
Choices
Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2
subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
Configuration
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
Basic
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16).
7ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone
and Zone2 speakers (p.22).
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including
bi-amp front speakers) (p.21).
5ch BI-AMP +SB
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including
bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using
an external amplifier (p.22).
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings
This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to
"Front".
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
Settings
Front
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Center
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Surround
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
Surround Back
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Small x2
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Front Presence
Use Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.
None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.
Choices
Surround
Settings
This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a
speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified
value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80
Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 3.00
m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to 0.0
dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Settings
“YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.38). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
Manual equalizer adjustment
1
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
Subwoofer
Use
Normal
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
None
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Layout
Rear
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side
of the room.
Front
Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front
side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works in this case.
Bass Cross Over
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through Does not use the equalizer.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114
To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.38) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
Settings
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Settings
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on
the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
Off Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Delay Enable
Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Auto/Manual Select
Auto
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0
ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
“Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.62).
Settings
Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
Adjustment
Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
Off
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume.)
Auto
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,
the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
On
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116
Extended Surround
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
Video
Configures the video output settings.
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.130) in
the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be
displayed on your TV normally.)
Auto
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
Direct Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
Resolution
Through Does not convert the resolution.
Auto
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,
1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.
HDMI
Configures the HDMI settings.
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.147).
Settings
To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio
when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–4
Default
AUDIO 1
When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for
connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
Aspect
Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
Off Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
TV Audio Input
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118
Enables/disables ARC (p.149) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers
connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the
unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the
unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) is set to “Main”.
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected
to the unit.
Settings
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Settings
The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
ARC
Off Disables ARC.
On
Enables ARC.
Standby Sync
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
Amp
Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Off Disables the audio output from the TV.
On Enables the audio output from the TV.
Off
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119
Network
Configures the network settings.
Network Connection
Selects the network connection method.
Settings
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings
Manual network settings
1
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
6
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
7
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.101) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.
Wired
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with
a commercially-available network cable (p.34)
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via
the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see
“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47).
Wireless Direct
Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the
unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device
to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.52).
DHCP
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
IP Address Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Off
Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Filter
Off Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be
permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address
6–10” and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press
ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys
(q/w) to select a value.
4
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
5
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
MAC Address 1–10
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
Main Zone Set
Configures the main zone setting.
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV
screen.
Procedure
1
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
2
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
volume adjustments for Zone2.
Settings
This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.111) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5
dB
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
Zone Rename
Volume
Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Off
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Settings
Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display.
Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
3
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main
Zone Set” (p.121).
Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and
VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main
, Zone2
To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main
, Zone2
For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147).
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
Mono
Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
Zone Scene Rename
Zone Rename
Disable Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123
Function
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
Procedure
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0
(higher to brighten)
The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.126) is set to “On”.
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is
operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
Dimmer (Front Display)
Short Message
On Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
Wallpaper
Picture1, Picture2,
Picture3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124
Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Settings
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,
switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Manual
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function
of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
DC OUT
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC
OUT jack.
Settings
Trigger Mode
Power
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High
Transmits the electronic signal.
Target Zone
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Zone2
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Power Mode
Continuous
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Main Zone Power
Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Settings
When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
ECO
Configures the power supply settings.
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if
no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into
standby mode.
Settings
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes
Other models: Off
Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
Off Does not protect the settings.
On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
Icon
Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
20 Minutes
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit
and no input signals are detected (or the unit is muted) for 20 minutes.
2 Hours, 4 Hours,
8 Hours, 12 Hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
CONFIGURATIONS Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 126
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
The information on the front display is provided in English only.
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
1
Press ON SCREEN.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Off Disables the eco mode.
On Enables the eco mode.
English
English
Japanese
French
German
Spanish
Russian
Italian
Chinese
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
CONFIGURATIONS Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 127
Types of information
Audio Signal
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Network
Displays the network information on the unit.
(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
(When using Wireless Direct)
Input
Format Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output
HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
Interface TV interface
Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server
DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address MAC address
Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120)
Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection
SSID
(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)
The SSID of the wireless network
SSID The SSID of the wireless network
Security Security method
Security Key Security key
IP Address IP address
Subnet Mask Subnet mask
MAC Address MAC address
Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 128
System
Displays the system information on the unit.
If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132).
Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
Set the unit to standby mode.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE
z
.
3
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
4
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
5
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.129)
TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.130)
Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.129)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.130)
System ID System ID number
Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit
Input The input source selected for Zone2
Volume The volume for Zone2
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 129
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Default settings are underlined.
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1
, ID2
Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
1
To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for
3 seconds.
To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3
seconds.
Item Function Page
SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 129
REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 129
REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 129
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
130
TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 130
MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 130
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
131
INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 131
FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 131
VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 131
6 MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8
MIN
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
8MIN
SPEAKERIMP.
ON Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
ON
REMOTESENSOR
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
ID1
REMOTECONAMP
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 130
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
(Asia and General models only)
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.116) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
3
ZONE
2
STEREO
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
FM50/AM9
TUNERFRQSTEP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
NTSC
TVFORMAT
YES
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
YES
MONITORCHECK
CONFIGURATIONS Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 131
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
Backup/recovery procedure
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Choices
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132).
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.128) in the “Information” menu.
It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
BACKUP
RECOV./BACKUP
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
CANCEL
INITIALIZE
USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
USB
FIRMUPDATE
OUT
1
IN
OUT
2
VOLUME
MUTE
DRCADAPTIVE
3
ZONE
2
SBLPL SBRSB PR
SW1
SL
SW2SW
SR
PL
CL R
PR
STEREO
ENHANCER
SLEEP
HD
TUNED
PRE
AMP
PARTY
ZONE
3
ZONE
4
HD
TAG
DOCK
SPIMP.-
x.xx
VERSION
CONFIGURATIONS Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 132
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.131).
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
1
Read the on-screen description.
2
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
The firmware update is complete.
If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.128). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
Note
Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.131).
For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.
Information
icon
Message
System Icon
90
ENT
MEMORY
5
687
1234
MOVIE
ENHANCER
TUNING PRESET
BAND
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
TOP MENU
MUTE
PROGRAM
VOLUME
POP-UP/MENU
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO SLEEP
MUSIC
PARTY HDMI OUT
TUNER
PHONO MULTI
MAIN
ZONE 2
MODE
SCENE
4321
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADIO
AV
AUDIO
5 6 7
V-AUX
1234
1234
SUR. DECODE
USB NET
9
0
EN
T
MEMORY
5
6
8
1
2
3
4
M
O
VI
E
ENHAN
CE
R
T
U
NIN
G
PRE
S
ET
BAN
D
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
ON
SC
RE
E
N
O
PTI
ON
T
O
P MEN
U
MUTE
PR
OG
RAM
V
O
L
U
ME
P
O
P-
U
P
/
MEN
U
P
U
RE DIRE
CT
S
TRAI
G
H
T
INF
O
S
LEE
P
MUSI
C
PARTY
HDMI
O
U
T
TUNER
PH
O
N
O
MULT
I
MAIN
ZONE
2
M
O
D
E
SC
EN
E
4
3
2
1
TVBD/DVD
NET
RADI
O
A
V
A
U
DI
O
5
6
7
V
-
AUX
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
SU
R. DE
CO
D
E
US
B
N
ET
ENTER
Cursor keys
APPENDIX Frequently asked questions En 133
APPENDIX
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.38). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.111).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.115). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.121).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.115). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.121).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.99).
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.123) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.125).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.129).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
Frequently asked questions
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 134
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.19).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.125).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.129).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.19).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of
the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.126).
The unit is not reacting.
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 135
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129).
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 136
Audio
Problem Cause Remedy
No sound.
Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume cannot be increased.
The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.115).
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.114).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.111).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.113).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
The extended surround is disabled.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Setup” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.116).
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu
(p.114).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.113).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.118).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 137
Video
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.117).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The sound is distorted.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.126).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
The sound is interrupted.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI
audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.88).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
No video.
Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.130).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.149).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26).
Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 138
FM/AM radio
The video is interrupted.
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.54).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.88).
Problem Cause Remedy
Problem Cause Remedy
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
(U.S.A. model only)
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.99).
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.99).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Select the station manually (p.63).
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Select the station manually (p.63).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.
model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.64).
The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.
(U.S.A. model only)
The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.99).
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 139
USB and network
Problem Cause Remedy
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.119). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.119).
The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a
wireless router (access point).
The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.
The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.
There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router
(access point).
Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are
no obstacles between them.
Wireless network is not found.
Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood
might disturb the wireless communication.
Turn off these devices.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the
wireless router (access point).
Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).
The unit does not detect the PC.
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.76).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.119).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
APPENDIX Troubleshooting En 140
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The iPod does not recognize the unit when using
AirPlay.
The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.
Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the
router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.119).
Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.131).
Problem Cause Remedy
APPENDIX Error indications on the front display En 141
Error indications on the front display
Message Cause Remedy
Access denied Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.76).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70).
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.34).
Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
MHL Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.
Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
No device
The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.129).
Unable to play
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.
APPENDIX Glossary En 142
Audio information
Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
FLAC
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
Glossary
APPENDIX Glossary En 143
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX Glossary En 144
Network information
SSID
SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the
Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making
connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance
interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.
WPS
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy
establishment of a wireless home network.
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual CINEMA FRONT
Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers
with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
APPENDIX Supported devices and file formats En 145
Supported devices
USB devices
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable
audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB
chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.
USB devices with encryption cannot be used.
Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of
the USB storage device.
iPod
An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
AirPlay
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X
Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
(as of April 2014)
File formats
USB
The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.
Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
PC/NAS
The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC,
FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files.
The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files.
To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of
FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
Supported devices and file formats
Made for.
iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)
iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G
iPad (4th generation), iPad mini, iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad
(as of April 2014)
About HTC Connect
This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from
your HTC Connect certified smartphone.
1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on
interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect
compatible smartphones.
2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding formats. Other
formats may not be compatible.
3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect.
4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC
Connect.
Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible
devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices
APPENDIX Supported devices and file formats En 146
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
Video conversion table
You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu.
The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
HDMI HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m: Available
HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out
VIDEO
out
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p 4K
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p 1080i 1080p
480i/
576i
HDMI in
480i/576i mmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm
720p mmmm
1080i mmmm
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
mmmm
1080p/24 Hz
mm
4K m
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
480i/576i mmmmmmm
480p/576p mmmmm m
720p mmmm m
1080i mmmm m
1080p m
VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m
Video device The unit TV
HDMI outHDMI in
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
VIDEO outVIDEO in
APPENDIX Information on HDMI En 147
Multi-zone output
Audio output
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected
Video output
m: Available
*3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
Standby synchronization
Volume control including mute
Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.55)
Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the exter
nal
d
evice operation keys
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier (
p.23
)
Using an external amplifier (p.87)
Zone2 Out
In
EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)
Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2)
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
mm
USB (including iPod) mm
Network sources mm
TUNER mm
Zone2 Out
In
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3)
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
jack (*4)
COMPONENT VIDEO
VIDEO
HDMI video m
Component video m
Composite video m
Information on HDMI
HDMI Control
Turn off the TV
The unit turns off
(standby)
HDMI Control
Playback device
also turns off
APPENDIX Information on HDMI En 148
(Example)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
b Press ON SCREEN.
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
3
Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
4
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
5
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
6
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
7
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
8
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.
HDMI Control
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
HDMI Control
Playback starts
DISPLAYRETURN
ENTER
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
DI
S
PL
A
Y
RETURN
O
PTI
ON
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
APPENDIX Information on HDMI En 149
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video
signal to the TV.
Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.
1
Select a TV program with the TV remote control.
2
Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched
to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:
– “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack
marked “ARC”) on the TV.
Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the
instruction manual for the TV.
If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an
audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.26).
When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
“AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the
AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input
assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.56), you also need to change the input assignment for
SCENE (TV).
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
VGA 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
480i/60 Hz 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
576i/50 Hz 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
480p/60 Hz 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
576p/50 Hz
APPENDIX Reference diagram (rear panel) En 150
The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
Reference diagram (rear panel)
(U.S.A. model)
APPENDIX Trademarks En 151
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro
Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195;
7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending.
DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of
DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that
an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically
to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its
compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad
may affect wireless performance.
iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari
are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS
and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity
Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the
HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or
service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved.
Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
Ubiquitous WPS2.0
Copyright © 2013 Ubiquitous Corp.
HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Trademarks
APPENDIX Specifications En 152
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 3 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)
•Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
Component x 3 (AV 1–3)
• HDMI Input
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)
* V-AUX: MHL input compatible
•Others
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R
, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R
*1
)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
• Digital Audio
Optical x 1 (AV OUT)
•Video
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
- Composite x 1
- Component x 1
AV OUT
- Composite x 1
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
• REMOTE OUT x 1
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
• RS-232C x 1
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(A
udio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Audio Format
-Dolby TrueHD
- Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital
- DTS-HD Master Audio
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- DTS Express
-DTS
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
Content Protection: HDCP compatible
Link Function: CEC supported
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
-VGA
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
TUNER
Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)
Specifications
APPENDIX Specifications En 153
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Internet Radio
• HTC Connect supported
• WiFi function
- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method
- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device
- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK
(AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode
- Radio Frequency: 2.4GHz
- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g
Compatible Decoding Formats
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movi
e,
D
olby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.............................................................110 W+110 W
Center..............................................................................110 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W
Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.............................................................120 W+120 W
Center..............................................................................120 W
Surround L/R ...................................................... 120 W+120 W
Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R.....................................................................135 W/ch
Center ........................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch
Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8
)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R.....................................................................165 W/ch
Center.........................................................................165 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8 ............................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 )................................ 3.5 mV/47 k
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more
Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k
HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k
ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less
MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 )
............................................................................ 0.04% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)
PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more
AUDIO2 etc...................................................... 110 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less
Channel Separation
(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more
AUDIO2 etc..............................................75 dB/60 dB or more
Volume Control
Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
APPENDIX Specifications En 154
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2
Bass Boost/Cut.............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).....................................................24 dB/oct.
Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC
[Other models].................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75
Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75
Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................71 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.5%/0.6%
HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03%
• Antenna Input................................................75 unbalanced
AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W
[Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W
[Other models] ................................................................420 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ..........................0.1 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)......2.4 W
Network Standby On
Wired .............................................................................3.1 W
Wi-Fi ..............................................................................3.8 W
Wireless Direct ..............................................................3.9 W
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),
Network Standby On (Wireless Direct).............................5.5 W
Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models]...........................................1190 W
Dimensions (W x H x D)
............................435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”)
* Including legs and protrusions
Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna)
......................435 x 242 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/2” x 17-1/4”)
Weight...........................................................14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
APPENDIX Index En 155
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!) 128, 132
Lock icon (o) 125
Numerics
16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 117
2.1-channel system 17
2ch Stereo (sound program) 59
3.1-channel system 17
4K Ultra HD 149
5.1-channel system 17
5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111
5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21
5ch BI-AMP +SB
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111
5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22
7.1+2-channel system 16
7.1-channel system 16
7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111
7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22
7ch Stereo (sound program) 59
A
A.DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97
A.Sel (Input Settings, Option menu) 99
Access denied (error indication) 141
Access error (error indication) 141
Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 50
Action Game (sound program) 59
Adaptive DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 115
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 115
ADVANCED SETUP menu 128
Advanced speaker configuration 20
Adventure (sound program) 58
AirPlay 83
Album (HD Radio™) 65
AM radio listening 63
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 149
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118
Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 65
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 117
Audio Decoder (front display information) 95
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 145
Audio file format (USB storage device) 145
Audio Mode (Option menu) 99
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 118
Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 65
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 149
Audio Select (Input Settings, Option menu) 99
Audio Signal (Information menu) 127
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 125
Auto Preset (FM radio) 69
Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 67
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 38
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 69
Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 67
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 125
B
Backup/recovery of the settings 131
Banana plug 19
Basic playback operation 54
Basic speaker configuration 16
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 97
Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 113
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Bitstream 149
Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 82
Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 82
C
Category (HD Radio™) 65
Cellar Club (sound program) 59
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 112
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 107
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 107
Chamber (sound program) 59
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Check SP Wires (error indication) 141
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 44
CINEMA DSP 58
CINEMA DSP 3D 58
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 59
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 69
Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 67
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 67
Compressed Music Enhancer 62
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 111
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 38
D
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 124
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 105
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 101
Decoder Off (front display information) 95
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 119
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 127
Default setting restoration 131
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114
Detail (Load, Scene menu) 103
Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 103
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 119
Dialog (Option menu) 98
Dialog Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98
Dialog Lvl (Dialogue, Option menu) 98
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Dialogue (Option menu) 98
Dialogue Level (Dialogue, Option menu) 98
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98
Dialogue normalization level 127
Index
APPENDIX Index En 156
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 101
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 107
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 123
Direct (Sound Program menu) 106
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 142
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 123
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 113
Distance (YPAO measurement result) 43
DLNA 76
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 101
DMC Control (Input menu) 101
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 119
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 127
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 116
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 61
Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 61
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 61
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 116
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 116
Drama (sound program) 58
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 142
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 105
DSP Program (front display information) 95
DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 61
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 116
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 115
E
ECO (Setup menu) 125
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 126
Enhancer (Option menu) 98
ENHANCER (sound mode) 62
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 59
Error indication (front display) 141
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Setup menu) 116
Extended Surround (Sound, Setup menu) 116
External power amplifier 24
Extra Bass (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 119
FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131
Firmware update 131
Firmware update (network) 131
Firmware update (USB) 131
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 128
Firmware version check 131
FM Mode (Option menu) 99
FM radio listening 63
FM/AM radio tuning 63
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 63
Frequency step setting 63
, 130
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 112
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 106
Front 5.1-channel system 17
Front display (part names and functions) 10
Front display brightness 123
Front display information 95
Front panel (part names and functions) 8
Front panel door (front panel) 8
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 112
Function (Setup menu) 123
G
Ground lead 30
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) 59
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 59
HD Radio™ information 65
HD Radio™ tuning 65
HDMI (Setup menu) 117
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 117
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 127
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118
HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122
HDMI output selection 54
HDMI signal compatibility 149
Headphones 60
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 106
High definition audio 149
HTC Connect 145
I
In.Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99
Indicator (part names and functions) 10
Information display (front display) 10
Information menu 126
Information switching (front display) 95
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121
INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 123
Input jack assignment 123
Input menu 100
Input Settings (Option menu) 99
Input Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99
Internal Error (error indication) 141
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 44
Internet radio listening 80
IP Address (Network, Information menu) 127
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 119
iPod charge 70
iPod content playback 70
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 83
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 83
L
Language (Setup menu) 126
Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 113
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 106
Level (Sound Program menu) 106
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 113
Level (YPAO measurement result) 43
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 45
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 143
Lipsync 143
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 114
LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 59
APPENDIX Index En 157
Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106
Load (Scene menu) 103
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 143
M
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 120
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 127
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 119
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121
Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 50
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 111
Manual speaker configuration 111
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 64
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115
Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121
Measurement result (YPAO) 43
Media sharing setup 76
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 125
Menu language selection 37
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 141
MHL-compatible mobile device 31
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 106
Monaural reception (FM radio) 63
Monitor check 130
MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130
Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122
Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122
Mono Movie (sound program) 58
MOVIE (sound program category) 58
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 58
Multi measurement (YPAO) 41
Multi Zone (Information menu) 128
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 121
Multiple room playback 85
Multi-zone 85
Multi-zone output 147
MUSIC (sound program category) 59
Music Video (sound program) 59
Muting 54
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage) 34
NAS content playback 77
Network (Information menu) 127
Network (Setup menu) 119
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 34
Network Connection (Network, Information menu) 127
Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 119
Network information 127
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 127
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 120
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 119
No content (error indication) 141
No device (error indication) 141
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 44
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 44
No MIC (YPAO error message) 44
No Signal (YPAO error message) 44
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 44
Noisy (YPAO error message) 44
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130
O
Option menu 96
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 45
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 45
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 107
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 113
Party mode 91
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122
PC content playback 77
PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 51
Please wait (error indication) 141
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 111
Power management 125
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 124
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 64
Program Service (Radio Data System) 67
Program Type (Radio Data System) 67
Pure Direct 62
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 62
Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115
Q
Q factor 114
R
Radio Data System information 67
Radio Data System tuning 67
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 67
Rear panel (part names and functions) 11
RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 141
REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129
Remote control (part names and functions) 13
Remote control ID setting 129
Remote control sensor setting 129
Remote ID (System, Information menu) 128
Remote Off (error indication) 141
REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129
Rename (input name) 101
Rename (network name) 120
Rename (scene name) 104
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 101
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 104
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 72
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 75
Reset (Scene menu) 104
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 116
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 106
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 106
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 106
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 43
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 59
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105
APPENDIX Index En 158
S
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127
Save (Scene menu) 102
SBR SBL (YPAO error message) 44
Scene configuration 56
SCENE function 55
SCENE link playback 56
Scene menu 102
Sci-Fi (sound program) 58
Security (Network, Information menu) 127
Security Key (Network, Information menu) 127
Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 111
Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 111
Setup menu 108
Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)
(Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 47
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 123
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 72
Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 75
Signal information 127
SILENT CINEMA 60
Simple play (iPod) 72
Single measurement (YPAO) 40
Size (YPAO measurement result) 43
Sleep timer 13
Sleep timer (Zone2) 91
Sound (Setup menu) 114
Sound field effect 58
Sound mode selection 57
Sound program 58
, 59
Sound Program menu 104
Speaker (Setup menu) 111
SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129
Speaker impedance 15
Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 128
Speaker impedance setting 18
, 129
Speaker placement 16
Spectacle (sound program) 58
Sports (sound program) 59
SSID 144
SSID (Network, Information menu) 127
Standard (sound program) 58
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 118
Station Info (HD Radio™) 65
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 64
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 59
Stereo reception (FM radio) 63
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 61
Straight decode 61
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 119
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 127
Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 113
Subwoofer Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98
Subwoofer/Bass (Option menu) 98
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 61
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 112
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 112
Surround Back Initial Delay
(Sound Program menu) 105
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106
Surround Back Room Size
(Sound Program menu) 105
Surround decoder 61
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105
SW.Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98
System (Information menu) 128
System ID (System, Information menu) 128
T
Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 114
The Bottom Line (sound program) 59
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 59
Tone Control (Option menu) 97
TP (Traffic Program) 68
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 68
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 68
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 97
Trigger function 36
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124
Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 124
Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 124
TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130
Tuner Frq. Step (System, Information menu) 128
TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 117
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130
TV Format (System, Information menu) 128
U
Unable to play (error indication) 141
USB Overloaded (error indication) 141
USB storage device content playback 73
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 44
V
V.Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131
Version error (error indication) 141
Video (Setup menu) 116
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 116
Video Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99
Video Process. (Option menu) 99
Video Processing (Option menu) 99
Video Signal (Information menu) 127
Video signal flow 146
Video signal type setting 130
Virtual CINEMA DSP 60
Virtual CINEMA FRONT 60
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7
Voltage selection 36
Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 101
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7
W
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 123
Web control 92
Wi-Fi 144
APPENDIX Index En 159
Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 119
Wired/Wireless (Network, Information menu) 127
Wireless (Wi-Fi)
(Network Connection, Setup menu) 47
, 119
Wireless Direct
(Network Connection, Setup menu) 52
, 119
Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 43
WPS 144
WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 49
WPS button configuration 48
Y
Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer
(YPAO) 38
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 38
YPAO error message 44
YPAO microphone 38
YPAO Vol. (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97
YPAO Volume (Option menu) 97
YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97
YPAO warning message 45
Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 121
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122
Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121
© 2014 Yamaha Corporation YG258C0/EN

Transcripción de documentos

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 6 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 38 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 PREPARATIONS 14 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 PLAYBACK 54 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Connecting the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 En 2 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 CONFIGURATIONS 100 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 126 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 128 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 En 3 APPENDIX 133 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  AM antenna  FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.  YPAO microphone  Wireless antenna • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.  Power cable  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.70 • USB . p.73 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.76 • Internet radio . p.80 • AirPlay . p.83 Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.38 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.58 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.62 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/iPad Audio • Bi-amp connections, channel expansion (with external power-amp) and multi-zone configurations to enhance your system . p.20 Audio USB device HDMI Control 3D and 4K Ultra HD signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV Control Audio/Video (via HDMI/MHL) Smartphone/Tablet AV receiver (the unit) Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.55 TV remote control . p.147 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.28) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.58) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting front presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26) I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.99). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.114). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.118). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… HDMI Control TV audio Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.98). Video from external device I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.46) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.60) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37). I want to update the firmware... Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.131). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.132). ❑ Low power consumption (p.126) Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Input settings (p.100) ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android™ device • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.105) By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. • SCENE settings (p.102) • Various function settings (p.109) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.127) • System settings (p.129) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT INPUT 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.117) • Standby Through is enabled (p.118) • Network Standby is enabled (p.119) • An iPod is being charged (p.70) VOLUME 7 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.62). 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. 7 Front panel door 8 Opening the front panel door • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) For protecting controls and jacks (p.9). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 3 Front display Displays information (p.10). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 8 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 ON SCREEN AB C OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 K INFO(WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM IJ ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.96). B DISPLAY key 2.1A VIDEO N O Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.97). Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 (p.91). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.61). AUDIO HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A R P E PROGRAM keys J FM and AM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.57). F SCENE keys G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL Switch between FM and AM (p.63). K PRESET keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.55). Displays status information on the TV (p.95). C TONE/BALANCE key L Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.90). Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.90). H INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.48). I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.64). Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.64). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.63). M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod (p.70). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.38). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. P VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.31, 32) or a smartphone (p.31). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 9 Front display (indicators) 1 23 4 6 5 7 8 9 ECO MUTE VOLUME ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP 3 4 IN OUT 1 2 3 2 ENHANCER PARTY HD STEREO TUNED 3 0A B C Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.126). 3 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.46). 4 ZONE2 Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90). 5 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 6 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.95). Blinks when audio is muted. FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR D 1 HDMI 7 MUTE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL DE 8 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 9 VIRTUAL Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) or the virtual surround processing (p.60) is working. 0 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62) is working. A STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. HD (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station signal. F D Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. E ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.97) is working. F Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Front presence speaker (L) N Front presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer B CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.58) is working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) is activated. C PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91) FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 Rear panel 1 2 3 DC OUT 5V 4 5 6 8 9 : A B HDMI HDMI OUT 2 0.5A 7 1 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 5 AV 6 E (U.S.A. model) NETWORK AV 4 C D ( 3 NET ) AV 7 WIRELESS (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR REMOTE B 1 RS-232C IN GND OUT 2 A AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L C Y PB AV 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 PR Y AUDIO 4 AV 3 PB PR MULTI CH INPUT 12V 0.1AMAX. TOTAL ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio AM SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L (4 RADIO) SINGLE 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.30). 2 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 3 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). 4 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.28), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88). 5 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.35). 6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT component/composite video jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component or composite video and outputting video signals (p.27) or for connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87). 7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.29). 8 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.28). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. B RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. C WIRELESS jack For connecting the supplied wireless antenna (p.34). D VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.36). E AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36). 9 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.36). 0 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.89). A NETWORK jack For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.34). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 DC OUT 5V HDMI HDMI OUT 2 0.5A 1 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (U.S.A. model) NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) AV 7 WIRELESS (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR REMOTE B 1 RS-232C IN GND OUT 2 A AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L C Y PB AV 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 PR Y AUDIO 4 AV 3 PB PR MULTI CH INPUT 12V 0.1AMAX. TOTAL ZONE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 R 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio AM SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L (4 RADIO) SINGLE F G F ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.33). G AUDIO 1–4 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.30). H I J K * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. J SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.15). K PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or to an external power amplifier (p.24). H MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel output and inputting audio signals (p.35). I ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.87). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. AV 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 Input selection keys AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER 4 MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 5 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 9 B C D E 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch H I J Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.90). 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.55). 6 PROGRAM keys ENTER Select a sound program (p.57). RETURN : A F G Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) TUNER FM/AM radio DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 7 External device operation keys Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.147). 8 ON SCREEN key SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE K MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72). (U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program (p.65). (U.S.A. model) A Radio keys Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.63). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.147). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.57). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.95). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.64). F HDMI OUT key Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.54). G PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). H VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. I MUTE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.96). K DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.95). • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on the keys other than those above, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Connecting speakers (p.15) Basic speaker configuration (p.16) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit. Advanced speaker configuration (p.20) Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance the system. 2 Connecting a TV (p.26) Connect a TV to the unit. 3 Connecting playback devices (p.28) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.33) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna (p.34) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 6 Connecting other devices (p.35) Connect external devices such as recording devices. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.36) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.38) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.46) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 Connecting speakers The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20). Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Front (L) 1 Function Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 E Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 1 9 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. Surround back (R) R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 3 9 Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. 4 5 10°~30° 10°~30° 6 • We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.58). 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. ❑ 7.1+2-channel system (using both surround back and front presence speakers) ❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. ❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) • The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.58). This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ 5.1-channel system ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) E R 1 9 2 3 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) ❑ 2.1-channel system 1 2 4 9 5 3 Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Setting the speaker impedance ■ Connecting speakers Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Speakers to be connected STRAIGHT Room 3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4 5 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type Abbr. 7+2 7 5 2 Front (L) 1 ● ● ● ● Front (R) 2 ● ● ● ● Center 3 ● ● ● Surround (L) 4 ● ● *3 Surround (R) 5 ● ● *3 Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 Front presence (L) E ● *2 *4 Front presence (R) R ● *2 *4 Power Amp Assign (p.111) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. Main zone Basic (default) If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence speakers (*2). If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. • To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an external power amplifier” (p.24). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) ❑ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. + – + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. Connection diagram b Loosen the speaker terminal. Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. The unit (rear) + (red) + b FR c ON T - a d – (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. E R 1 b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. a 2 Banana plug 9 3 9 4 5 + FR ON T b ❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 6 7 Audio pin cable PRE OUT (SING LE) 1 2 SURR UND SUR. BA CK SUBW OOFE R CENT ER CENT ER FRO NT • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Advanced speaker configuration In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system. Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds Bi-amp connection Combining with an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to build an extended system Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room Power-amp channel expansion (Example) Multi-zone configuration (Example) (Example) External power amplifier Bi-amp connection Zone2 Main zone PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Available speaker configurations ❑ 5ch BI-AMP Main zone Output channel (max) Bi-amp 5  7  7 Bi-amp External power amplifier (required) Multi-zone Surround back +1 (Zone2) Power Amp Assign (p.111) Page 5ch BI-AMP 21 5ch BI-AMP +SB 22 7ch +1ZONE 22 1 2 3 9 4 9 5 • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 67 (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE Bi-amp 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 1 5 6 7 2 9 3 4 5 6 2 7 Zone2 Main zone via external amp Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ■ Connecting Zone2 speakers When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals. When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals. To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) The unit (rear) 1 1 9 2 4 3 FL 9 FR 9 4 3 9 2 5 6 7 Zone2 5 Main zone • You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87). • The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. (Example) Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks Main input jack Caution MAIN IN PR • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. – When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the pre-main amplifier. FRONT L L R R Amplifier with volume control bypass (such as A-S3000) SUR The unit (rear) The unit (rear) 1 23 4 1 FRONT jacks Output front channel sounds. 2 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. 3 SUR. BACK jacks About external power amplifiers We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions. • With unbalanced inputs • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit) • Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 ) Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side). 4 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable EN PON COM Component video cable AV 1 A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ❑ VIDEO jacks • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. AV 1 Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable Video pin cable • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. ❑ HDMI/MHL jack Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL or HDMI cable. ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). MHL or HDMI cable Stereo pin cable • The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both MHL and HDMI connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.31). When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an HDMI cable. PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. ■ HDMI connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. ■ Component/composite video connection When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.28). The unit (rear) About Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI OUT jack HDMI OUT 2 1 (ZONE OUT) HDMI input ARC HDMI • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. HDMI HDMI • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L L L R R R TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) • You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.147). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT Y PB PR ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT Video input (composite video) PR VIDEO ZONE OUT PB Video input (component video) Y V V COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y PB PR AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L PB L L R R Y R AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) TV L L L R R 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL R O O TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector HDMI The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.54). The unit (rear) (ZONE OUT) The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.70) HDMI OUT 2 jack HDMI OUT 2 3 Connecting playback devices • Connecting a USB storage device (p.73) 1 ARC TV Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. HDMI HDMI input HDMI • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.146). TV (already connected) Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88). • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu. ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. The unit (rear) HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks HDMI output HDMI HDMI HDMI Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Component video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Y The unit (rear) PB Input jacks on the unit Video PR Audio Composite video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks PR Video output (composite video) PB Y V VIDEO Video output (component video) PR Y PB V PR PB C C Y COAXIAL O C C L COAXIAL O Video device Video device O L L R R OPTICAL O R L L L R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 29 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO jacks PHONO Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. Audio output (PHONO) Ground lead GND The unit (rear) GND PHONO L L L L R R R R Turntable • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.99) in the “Option” menu. Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) C COAXIAL O Analog stereo Turntable (PHONO) C Audio device O AV 1–4 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO) L L L R R PHONO OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73). ❑ MHL connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 ❑ HDMI connection RETURN PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM ZONE 2 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A R MHL TUNING The unit (front) ENTER RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A MHL output HDMI The unit (front) MHL Mobile device If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. Game console • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26). • You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device. • If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. • If “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable. MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V 2.1A VIDEO L V L AUDIO R HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A R The unit (front) Game console Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. • The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase. FM antenna AM antenna Connecting the AM antenna Hold down The unit (rear) Insert Release • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or connect the supplied wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. Connecting the wireless antenna You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Connect the supplied wireless antenna to the unit for establishing a wireless network connection. For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.46). Connecting the network cable Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) WAN b ESS WIREL LAN a Modem PC a Rotate the antenna clockwise. Network cable Router b Stand the antenna up straight. The unit (rear) Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) • Do not connect the antenna other than the supplied one. • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. • When packing the unit, remove the antenna to prevent damage. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.119). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a network cable or the wireless antenna En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 Connecting other devices Connecting recording devices Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output video/audio signals selected as the input. You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. The unit (rear) • The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. AV OUT jacks The unit (rear) AV OUT Video/audio input VIDEO V MULTI CH INPUT Channel output (Center) CENTER V (Subwoofer) AUDIO L L R R L R Video/audio recording device FRONT MULTI CH INPUT jacks SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER L (Surround back) R OPTICAL O L (Surround) Device with analog multi-channel output O R L (Front) R If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video Out” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection. • Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker configuration. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not available. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks. 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. TRIGGER OUT 1 The unit (rear) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 12V 0.1AMAX. TOTAL VOLTAGE SELECTOR System connection input 220V240V 110V120V Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu. After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) To an AC wall outlet PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. OPTION Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 z 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic” (default). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set to the appropriate setting. • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. 5 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM According to your speaker configuration, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. – Do not connect headphones. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. YPAO MIC jack The unit (front) YPAO MIC Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 1 9 VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MAX MIN 3 9 4 MIN 2 MAX YPAO 5 microphone Ear height PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 The following screen appears on the TV. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. AUDIO Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 6 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). d e bac a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) BAND MODE TUNING a PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 b c a e d c a b d Settings Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.41) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.40) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 39 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER ZONE 2 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement. AUDIO MAIN 3 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. TOP MENU • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.43). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. PREPARATIONS ➤ • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the “Option” menu. Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.44) or “Warning messages” (p.45). SCENE 1 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 41 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.97) in the “Option” menu. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.43). 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Checking the measurement results Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments You can check the YPAO measurement results. When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 AUDIO After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.108). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM The following screen appears. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 1 Measurement result items SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) 2 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 43 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10:Internal Err. Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1:Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.43) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2:Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.43) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3:Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Select “Level” in “Result” (p.43) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 Connecting to a network device wirelessly Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. The unit Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.52). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.34) or the wireless network connection (p.47). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.34) or Wireless Direct (p.52). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting the unit to a wireless network AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. AUDIO Select a connection method according to your environment. Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch)? TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Yes A (p.47) SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Does your wireless router (access point) has a WPS button? VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM No POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Yes B (p.48) No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER 4 C (p.49) DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. • You need iOS device with iOS 5.0 or later. For details on supported devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. The unit (front) AUDIO ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY PHONES VIDEO AUX SILENT CINEMA YPAO MIC 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and 1 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 11 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. press ENTER. OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO 1 2 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 ON SCREEN OPTION 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 8 The following connection methods are available. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.47). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.50). Manual Setting You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.50). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.51). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AUDIO 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD/DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. AUDIO ZONE 2 If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 3 ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). OPTION ENTER Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. TUNER MAIN Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AUDIO TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 2 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WEP • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. AUDIO Otherwise, enter either 5 or 13 character string. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD/DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network device wirelessly En 53 PLAYBACK AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO Input selection keys TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Basic playback procedure 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ON SCREEN For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63) BAND MODE TUNING • Playing back iPod music (p.70) PRESET • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. OUT 2 Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.55). • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122)), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) 4 OUT 1+2 • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.97). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 54 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN HDMI Output DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO) Input (p.54) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Audio Select (p.99) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.54) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 Sound Program (p.57) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.115) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.62) Off On On On Input OPTION ENTER 1 (BD/DVD) Mode PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.102). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 55 Configuring scene assignments AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 SCENE1 SETComplete MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu. Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.103) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround Video Video Mode Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 56 Selecting the sound mode AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN PROGRAM ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.104). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.59). • When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (p.61) is automatically selected. ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND MOVIE ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback DISPLAY MODE TUNING a Press ON SCREEN. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.58). OPTION ENTER On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.126). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.61). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.61). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.62). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.62). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 57 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “CINEMA DSP n” lights up Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. When VPS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 58 ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.60) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 59 ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.17) and enjoy multi-channel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 60 Enjoying unprocessed playback AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.142). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. HD 3 Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) SUR.DECODE ProLogic bPro Logic ENTER RETURN DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP DISPLAY HD 3 STRAIGHT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR BAND MODE TUNING bPLII Music SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music SUR.DECODE PRESET bPLIIx Movie MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu to a setting other than “Off”. bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works when multi-channel source is played back. bPLII Game Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.112) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 61 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AUDIO 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press PURE DIRECT. HD TOP MENU PUREDIRECT 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION EnhancerOn • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR RETURN DISPLAY – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu BAND – Using the multi-zone function MODE TUNING PRESET L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR “ENHANCER” lights up – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SL – Output from the AV OUT jacks SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE VOLUME ENHANCER – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ENHANCER • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.98) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 62 Listening to FM/AM radio AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER TUNER MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 (Asia and General models only) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). FM98.50MHz STEREO TUNED VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR 4 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • (U.S.A. model only) You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “Audio Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.) • (Except for U.S.A. model) You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.99) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 63 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.67, p.69). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Selecting a preset station Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.63) to tune into the desired radio station. Preset STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR OPTION • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. ENTER RETURN • (U.S.A. model only) To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.65) after tuning into the radio station. DISPLAY BAND • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Numeric keys MEMORY 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.67, p.69). The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Preset number Preset STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset STEREO TUNED 01:Empty FM98.50MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 64 HD Radio™ tuning ■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program (U.S.A. model only) You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio Technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. AUDIO TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION RETURN BAND MODE TUNING Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience PRESET SLEEP HD TUNED FM88.9MHz3 WXYZ-FM VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL ■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre. INFO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the item switches. Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 HD2/3 of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams. TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8) directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it). 1 DISPLAY MODE INFO Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio program. You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display. ENTER MOVIE 1 HD TUNED Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio Info Category stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds like a CD. Numeric keys ENT VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Item name About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed. When tuning into an HD Radio station FM88.9-1 Relative/total program number (when multiple programs are available) HD1/3 HD TUNED FM88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM “HD” lights up HD TUNED WXYZ-FM RhythmandBlu VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign) Category Station name (call sign), program category Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title Album Station name (call sign), album title DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Absolute program number (when multiple programs are available) • The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys. • When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.99), you can tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only. • Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station or period of time. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 65 ■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Program (+/-) Selects an audio program (when multiple audio programs are available). Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. Switches to FM/AM. AM Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. Manual Tuning TOP MENU 1 2 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 4 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Radio station information MODE TUNING Function FM 3 PROGRAM Submenu ❑ Playback screen SCENE 1 Menu You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on the TV. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 2 HD indicator Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 66 ■ Browse screen Radio Data System tuning AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 AUDIO 3 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Preset station list VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.69). 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING 1 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. STEREO TUNED INFO 3 Auto Preset Automatically registers HD Radio (FM/AM) stations and FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT Utility Info ProgramType VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1 (HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program, register it manually (p.64). STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz CLASSICS VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 67 Operating the radio on the TV • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. AUDIO TUNER TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU ■ Receiving traffic information automatically 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. • (U.S.A. model only) See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.66) to operate the radio on the TV. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. ■ Playback screen 3 1 2 4 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 9 The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished STEREO TUNED TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL Traffic information station (frequency) 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 Band icon (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM. • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 68 Menu AV 1 2 3 Submenu Function FM AM (U.K. and Europe models only) Switches to FM/AM. Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Browse screen 1 AUDIO Manual Tuning TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 2 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number 3 Operation menu Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu MODE TUNING SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PRESET MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Utility 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 69 Playing back iPod music AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). TUNER MAIN 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Connecting an iPod POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 SCENE 1 Playback of iPod content Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) BAND ON SCREEN OPTION TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT MODE TUNING PRESET PROGRAM ENTER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT RETURN MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT DISPLAY PHONES SILENT CINEMA ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 YPAO MIC 5V 4 • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. 2.1A 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.72). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 70 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Status indicators Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. Play Control 10 Pages Down Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Return Returns to the higher-level list. h Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. j Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 71 ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 AUDIO ZONE 2 The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Cursor keys Select an item. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ENTER Confirms the selection. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. a BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP MODE ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY 9 • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. Operational remote control Function keys POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. TUNER MAIN ■ Shuffle/repeat settings External device operation keys d Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f g h ENT j Skips forward/backward. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Repeat (Repeat) 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 72 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION Playback of USB storage device contents • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device 1 You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. 1 The unit (front) ENTER ON SCREEN RETURN OPTION Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT PROGRAM DISPLAY ENTER BAND RETURN DISPLAY PHONES MODE SILENT CINEMA TUNING YPAO MIC PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 5V 2.1A MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 73 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUDIO 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). MUSIC Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 74 ■ Playback screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AUDIO 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Play Control Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) f g Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 75 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.34). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 76 Playback of PC music contents 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO NET 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 77 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Contents list RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. OPTION ENTER MOVIE 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Play Control 1 Page Down Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f 10 Pages Up g Moves 10 pages forward/backward. Skips forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.101). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 78 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 79 Listening to Internet radio AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. Playback of Internet radio AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT NET TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.34). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. • This service may be discontinued without notice. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 80 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Playback screen 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 5 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 Playback indicator 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ON SCREEN Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). Bookmark On Play Control Function s Stops playback. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 81 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 3 Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. You can find the vTuner ID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 82 Playing back music with AirPlay The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) ) appears. iPod (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. 2 • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.145). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 83 Menu • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. AV 1 2 5 3 6 4 7 • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu. V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.101) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Play Control Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Screen Off SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Caution • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Skips forward/backward. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT iTunes (example of English version) 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. ■ Playback screen 4 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Check this box 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music with AirPlay En 84 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). ■ Enjoying videos/music in another room You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room. ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147). Video (ZONE OUT) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Multi-zone configuration examples Study room (Zone2) ■ Enjoying music in another room You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room. Living room (main zone) Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.87 Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Study room (Zone2) • Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog video/audio jacks of the unit. Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 • Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of the unit. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 85 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. Video/audio (HDMI) • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.88 • Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of the unit. ■ Connecting speakers to play back audio Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). ❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 86 ❑ Using an external amplifier ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. The unit (rear) ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. ZONE OUT L R The unit (rear) ZONE 2 External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) Video input (component video or composite video) L MONITOR OUT R PB Y PR PR COMPONENT VIDEO PB AUDIO Y ZONE OUT Y PR PB PR PB V Y ZONE OUT jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) VIDEO V Zone2 Main zone Zone2 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 87 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone2). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source – Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”) • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.28). • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. • On-screen operations are not available for Zone2. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (Example: using a TV) HDMI input HDMI OUT 2 HDMI (ZONE OUT) HDMI HDMI Zone2 (Example: using an AV amplifier) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Main zone Zone2 To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 88 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. REMOTE REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Infrared signal receiver The unit (rear) Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) REMOTE IN OUT Remote control Zone2 Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 89 z Controlling Zone2 4 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Input selection keys 1 2 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.63) When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back iPod music (p.70) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147). • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.92) to control Zone2. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 90 ■ Other operations for Zone2 The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Press VOLUME or MUTE. Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) Press SCENE. TUNER MAIN The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Adjusting the volume AUDIO ZONE 2 PARTY 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE MUTE Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Setting the sleep timer When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds ENTER a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. RETURN DISPLAY b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. BAND MODE TUNING MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). • If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Press PARTY. • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOLUME OPTION ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. • When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the following functions are not available. – Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance – Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.127) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.94) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.119), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. PC Router The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.94) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 6.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 92 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 5 7 1 CONTROL Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. 2 STATUS Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. 3 SETTINGS Moves to the settings screen. 4 PARTY MODE Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). 5 SYSTEM POWER Turns on/off the power for all zones. 6 MAIN VOLUME Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 4 2 6 1 PLAY INFO Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 TOP MENU Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SCENE Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 POWER Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 VOLUME Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 93 ■ Settings screen Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 1 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 2 3 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120) or the name of each zone (p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.119) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.119). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.119) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.119). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. PLAYBACK ➤ Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) En 94 Viewing the current status AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 Switching information on the front display AUDIO PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. Input source group USB SERVER AirPlay SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Info AudioDecoder Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER DOCK TAG HD RETURN DISPLAY DISPLAY PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 BAND AV1 ProLogic MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MODE TUNING PRESET * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Information 1 MOVIE Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Compressed Music Enhancer status INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–4 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (p.65). * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67). Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 95 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl • Default settings are underlined. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 97 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 97 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 97 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) TV screen 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Page Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 98 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 98 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) 98 98 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 98 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Video Processing (Video Process.) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 99 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 99 Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 99 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 99 (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. 99 Input Trim (In.Trim) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Input Settings Audio Select (Input Settings) (A.Sel) Video Out (V.Out) Audio Mode (Audio Mode) PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 96 Page ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Item Function FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 99 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 68 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — Settings Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.38). • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Settings • You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low On Off Input level PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 97 ■ Dialogue (Dialog) ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Settings Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.58) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62). • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Ideal position • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.62). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 98 ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Video Out (V.Out) Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings Settings Direct (Direct) Processing (Processing) Off (Off) Does not output video. AV 1–7 (AV1–7), V-AUX (V-AUX) Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. Disables the video signal processing. Enables the video signal processing. Default USB: V-AUX (V-AUX) Others: Off (Off) ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) Configures the input settings. ■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM). Settings Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Auto (Auto) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good. Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds. Audio Select (A.Sel) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Settings • HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode. Auto (Auto) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Analog (Analog) Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 101 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 101 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 101 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 101 CONFIGURATIONS Page ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 100 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) Settings Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 101 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. 5 6 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.55) using the TV screen. 1 2 3 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Scene menu items Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 102 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 103 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 104 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 104 ■ Save • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.56). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 102 ■ Load Detail Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. Device Control Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Check or uncheck Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off Choices • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147). Input Input (p.54), Audio Select (p.99) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.54) Mode Sound Program (p.57), Pure Direct Mode (p.115), Enhancer (p.62) Sound Tone Control (p.97), YPAO Volume (p.97), Adaptive DRC (p.97), Extra Bass (p.98) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.115), Dialogue Lift (p.98), Dialogue Level (p.98), Subwoofer Trim (p.98), Extended Surround (p.116) Video Video Mode (p.116) Volume Master Volume (p.54) Lipsync Lipsync (p.114), Delay (p.115) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.111), PEQ Select (p.113) Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 103 ■ Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.55) for the selected scene. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 104 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Sound Program menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Item Function Decode Type bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 105 Item Function Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Settings Sound program 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. Reverb Delay Reverb Level 2ch Stereo Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto, Off Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the front presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The front presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 106 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type Item Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) Neo:6 Music CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 107 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 108 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 38 Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 111 Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 111 Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 111 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 112 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 112 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 112 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 112 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 112 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 113 Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. 113 Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. 113 Auto Setup Speaker Page Configuration Manual Setup Lipsync Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 113 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 113 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 113 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 114 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 114 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 114 Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 115 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 115 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 115 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 115 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 115 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 115 Adjustment Sound Video CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 115 Extended Surround Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 116 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 116 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 109 Menu Item HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 117 HDMI Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 118 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 118 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 119 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 119 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 119 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 119 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 120 Network Main Zone Set Function Page Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 121 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 121 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 121 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 121 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 122 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. 122 Zone Rename Zone2 Set Multi Zone Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 122 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 122 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 122 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 122 Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 123 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 123 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 123 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 123 Input Assignment Display Set Function Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 124 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 124 DC OUT Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 124 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 125 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 125 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 126 Select an on-screen menu language. 126 Power Mode ECO Language CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 110 Speaker (Manual Setup) Configures the speaker settings manually. ■ Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. • Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system. Settings ■ Setting Pattern Basic Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16). Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 7ch +1ZONE Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone2 speakers (p.22). When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) (p.21). 5ch BI-AMP +SB Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.22). • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Power Amp Assign • Configuration • Distance ■ Configuration • Level Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1, Pattern2 • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 111 Front Surround Back Selects the size of the front speakers. Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. • This setting is not available when “Surround" is set to "None", or when “Layout (Surround)" is set to "Front". Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. Settings Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Use Select this option when front presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112 ■ Distance Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. Settings Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. ■ Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Layout Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. ■ Parametric EQ Choices Surround Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Settings Settings Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.60) works in this case. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Bass Cross Over Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz • If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.38). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 3 Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113 Sound • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.38) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 Configures the audio output settings. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB 5 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range ■ Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114 ■ Initial Volume Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) ■ Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.62). Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Settings Auto Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. ■ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. Settings Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.58). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115 ■ Extended Surround Video Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. Configures the video output settings. Settings Auto Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.130) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116 Aspect HDMI Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Configures the HDMI settings. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.147). Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AUDIO 1–4 Default AUDIO 1 • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117 ARC HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Enables/disables ARC (p.149) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. Standby Sync ■ Standby Through Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Settings Off Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) is set to “Main”. Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118 Network 2 Configures the network settings. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. ■ Network Connection Selects the network connection method. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.34) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.47). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.52). ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). DHCP ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Filter Select whether to use a DHCP server. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. Off Disables the MAC address filter. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ■ Manual network settings 1 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. • AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.101) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119 MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120 Multi Zone Configures the multi zone settings. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Zone2 Set Configures the Zone2 settings. Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume adjustments for Zone2. Settings ■ Main Zone Set Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Configures the main zone setting. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.111) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121 Mono ■ Monitor Out Assign Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2. Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display. ■ Procedure 1 2 3 Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Settings Main, Zone2 • To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Settings Main, Zone2 • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.147). ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91). Choice Target: Zone2 Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.121). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122 Function 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. ■ Procedure Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.126) is set to “On”. Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Settings On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings 2 Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER. Picture1, Picture2, Picture3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123 ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 Target Zone Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Zone2 Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Source ■ DC OUT Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Configures the DC OUT jack setting. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. Manual Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Continuous Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Main Zone Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is turned on. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.) Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124 ■ Memory Guard ECO Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Configures the power supply settings. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected (or the unit is muted) for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125 ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. Language Select an on-screen menu language. Settings English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 126 ■ Network Types of information Displays the network information on the unit. ■ Audio Signal (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Displays information about the current audio signal. Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC address Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.120) Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal MAC Address Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Network Name The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network Dialogue Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output (When using Wireless Direct) • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method Security Key Security key IP Address IP address Subnet mask HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output Subnet Mask HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) MAC Address MAC address Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication Analog Resolution ■ HDMI Monitor Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 127 ■ System Displays the system information on the unit. Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.129) Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.130) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.129) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.130) System ID System ID number 1 2 Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132). PROGRAM ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume for Zone2 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 128 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) • Default settings are underlined. Item SPIMP.- Function DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP Page HD 3 SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 129 REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 129 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 129 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 130 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 130 MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 130 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 131 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 131 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 131 Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. SPIMP.HD 3 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Settings ON Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 131 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. HD 3 VERSION REMOTESENSOR ON REMOTECONAMP ID1 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. Settings ID1, ID2 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 6  MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8  MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE (TV) together for 3 seconds. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 129 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) (Asia and General models only) DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 HD 3 Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. MONITORCHECK YES MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.116) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 130 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP SPIMP.- MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. Choices BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.132). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. VERSION x.xx MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.128) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 131 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 3 If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. TUNER MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.131). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.128). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.131). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 132 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.38). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.111). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.115). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.121). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.115). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.121). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.125). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.129). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.99). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.147). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 133 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.125). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.129). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.19). The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.126). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 134 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 135 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.115). The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.114). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.111). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.113). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Setup” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.116). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.114). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.38) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.113). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.118). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 136 Problem No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.117). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.118). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. Noise/hum is heard. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.126). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.130). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.127). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.149). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 137 Problem The video is interrupted. Cause Remedy (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.54). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. FM/AM radio Problem (U.S.A. model only) Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.99). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. (Except for U.S.A. model) Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.99). Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.63). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.63). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A. model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.64). The unit does not receive HD Radio signals. (U.S.A. model only) The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.99). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 138 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.119). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.119). The unit does not detect the USB device. The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.119). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 139 Problem The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. Cause Remedy The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.119). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.131). The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 140 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.34). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.129). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.129). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. No device Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 141 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 142 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 143 Network information Yamaha technologies SSID CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 144 Supported devices and file formats ■ Supported devices About HTC Connect This receiver features “HTC Connect”, a simple way to enjoy all music content from your HTC Connect certified smartphone. ❑ USB devices 1. HTC Connect music streaming provided on this product has been developed based on interoperability testing as defined by the HTC Connect program with the HTC Connect compatible smartphones. • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. 2. HTC Connect has been tested with MP3, AAC, WMA and WAV encoding formats. Other formats may not be compatible. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. 3. High network congestion may interfere with the operation of HTC Connect. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. ❑ iPod Made for. iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G iPad (4th generation), iPad mini, iPad (3rd generation), iPad 2, iPad (as of April 2014) 4. Music navigation via the music progress bar is not currently supported with HTC Connect. Please check HTC website for up to date information about features, compatible devices and audio format support: http://www.htc-connect.com/certified-devices ■ File formats ❑ USB • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, 96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of April 2014) • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. ❑ PC/NAS • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC, FLAC and ALAC (Apple Lossless Audio Codec) files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, 96 kHz for ALAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • The unit supports gapless playback of WAV, FLAC and ALAC files. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 145 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Video device The unit HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y m 480p/576p VIDEO VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i m m m m m 1080p VIDEO in 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m m m: Available APPENDIX ➤ Supported devices and file formats En 146 Multi-zone output Information on HDMI ■ Audio output Using the unit’s internal amplifier (p.23) HDMI Control Using an external amplifier (p.87) Zone2 Out EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks In HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*1) m (*2) Digital audio (HDMI) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m USB (including iPod) m m Network sources m m TUNER m m HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.28). Operations available from the TV’s remote control • Standby synchronization m: Available *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) ■ Video output Zone2 Out In MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3) COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO m HDMI video Component video Composite video m HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*4) Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV m m: Available *3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.55) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 147 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 5 6 7 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 148 Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI signal compatibility ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Audio signals Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 1 2 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: – “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.26). • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.56), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 149 Reference diagram (rear panel) (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 150 Trademarks Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. This receiver supports network connections. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Ubiquitous WPS2.0 “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. Copyright © 2013 Ubiquitous Corp. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. HTC, HTC Connect and the HTC Connect Logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of HTC Corporation. iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 151 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 3 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1) Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2) • Video Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) Component x 3 (AV 1–3) • HDMI Input HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*) * V-AUX: MHL input compatible • Video - Dolby TrueHD - Composite x 1 - Dolby Digital Plus - Component x 1 - Dolby Digital AV OUT - DTS-HD Master Audio - Composite x 1 - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • HDMI Output NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Output jacks • Analog Audio - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, - DTS * barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2) - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch Other jacks • YPAO MIC x 1 • REMOTE OUT x 1 MHL • TRIGGER OUT x 2 • Video Format (Repeater Mode) • RS-232C x 1 HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD - 576i/50 Hz - 480p/60 Hz - 576p/50 Hz - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) - 480p/60 Hz • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A - 576p/50 Hz TUNER - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Audio x 1 (AV OUT) - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz - ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2) - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz Optical x 1 (AV OUT) - 576i/50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - 480i/60 Hz • Digital Audio - VGA - 480i/60 Hz • DC OUT x 1 *1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE, SURROUND BACK L/R) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported - VGA - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • REMOTE IN x 1 SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R*1) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] - DTS Express HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*) • Others USB x 1 (USB2.0) • Audio Format MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Analog Tuner [U.K. and Europe models] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) [Other models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER) APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 152 USB Audio Section • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ............................................................. 110 W+110 W Network Center..............................................................................110 W • PC Client Function Surround L/R ...................................................... 110 W+110 W • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 • AirPlay supported Surround Back L/R ............................................. 110 W+110 W (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ............................................................. 120 W+120 W • Internet Radio Center..............................................................................120 W • HTC Connect supported Surround L/R ...................................................... 120 W+120 W • WiFi function - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method Surround Back L/R ............................................. 120 W+120 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100  PRE OUT SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k • Frequency Response AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 ) - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch ............................................................................ 0.04% or less (AES), WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode Center ........................................................................135 W/ch - Radio Frequency: 2.4GHz Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) [China, Korea, Asia and General models] • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) (Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out) PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more AUDIO2 etc...................................................... 110 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation Front L/R .....................................................................165 W/ch (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) Center.........................................................................165 W/ch PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W AUDIO2 etc..............................................75 dB/60 dB or more • Volume Control Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 153 • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono .................................................................3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ........................................... 1190 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................71 dB/70 dB ............................ 435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”) Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) HD [U.S.A. model]........................................................... 80 dB * Including legs and protrusions Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz Zone2 Bass Boost/Cut .............................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ....................... 0.5%/0.6% HD [U.S.A. model]...........................................................0.03% Treble Boost/Cut ...........................±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) • Antenna Input................................................ 75  unbalanced Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz AM section • Filter Characteristics • Tuning Range (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) [Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz .................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) (with wireless antenna) ......................435 x 242 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-1/2” x 17-1/4”) • Weight...........................................................14.9 kg (32.8 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Video Section • Video Signal Type General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC [General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [Other models].................................................................... PAL [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz • Video Signal Level [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75  [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz Component [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  • Power Consumption Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75  [U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W • Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more [Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W • Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) ............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB [Other models] ................................................................420 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off ..........................0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)......2.4 W Network Standby On FM Section Wired .............................................................................3.1 W • Tuning Range Wi-Fi ..............................................................................3.8 W [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz Wireless Direct ..............................................................3.9 W [Asia and General models] HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz Network Standby On (Wireless Direct).............................5.5 W [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 154 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 125 128, 132 Numerics 16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 117 2.1-channel system 17 2ch Stereo (sound program) 59 3.1-channel system 17 4K Ultra HD 149 5.1-channel system 17 5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111 5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21 5ch BI-AMP +SB (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111 5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22 7.1+2-channel system 16 7.1-channel system 16 7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 111 7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22 7ch Stereo (sound program) 59 A A.DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 A.Sel (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Access denied (error indication) 141 Access error (error indication) 141 Access Point Scan (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) Action Game (sound program) 59 Adaptive DRC (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 115 ADVANCED SETUP menu 128 Advanced speaker configuration 20 Adventure (sound program) 58 AirPlay 83 Album (HD Radio™) 65 AM radio listening 63 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 149 ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118 Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 65 Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 117 Audio Decoder (front display information) 95 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 145 Audio file format (USB storage device) 145 Audio Mode (Option menu) 99 Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 118 Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 65 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 149 Audio Select (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Audio Signal (Information menu) 127 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 125 Auto Preset (FM radio) 69 Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 67 Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 38 Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 69 Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 67 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 125 B 50 Backup/recovery of the settings 131 Banana plug 19 Basic playback operation 54 Basic speaker configuration 16 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 97 Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Bitstream 149 Bookmark Off (Internet radio, Option menu) 82 Bookmark On (Internet radio, Option menu) 82 C Category (HD Radio™) 65 Cellar Club (sound program) 59 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Center Image (Sound Program menu) 107 Center Width (Sound Program menu) 107 Chamber (sound program) 59 Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Check SP Wires (error indication) 141 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 44 CINEMA DSP 58 CINEMA DSP 3D 58 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115 CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 59 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 69 Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 67 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 67 Compressed Music Enhancer 62 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 38 D DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 124 Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 105 Decoder Mode (Input menu) 101 Decoder Off (front display information) 95 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 127 Default setting restoration 131 Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 114 Detail (Load, Scene menu) 103 Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 103 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 Dialog (Option menu) 98 Dialog Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialog Lvl (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Dialogue (Option menu) 98 Dialogue Level (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialogue Lift (Dialogue, Option menu) 98 Dialogue normalization level 127 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 155 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 101 Dimension (Sound Program menu) 107 Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 123 Direct (Sound Program menu) 106 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 142 Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 123 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Distance (YPAO measurement result) 43 DLNA 76 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 101 DMC Control (Input menu) 101 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 127 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 116 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 61 Dolby Pro Logic II (surround decoder) 61 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (surround decoder) 61 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 116 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 116 Drama (sound program) 58 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 142 DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 105 DSP Program (front display information) 95 DTS Neo:6 (surround decoder) 61 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 116 Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 115 FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 Firmware update 131 Firmware update (network) 131 Firmware update (USB) 131 Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 128 Firmware version check 131 FM Mode (Option menu) 99 FM radio listening 63 FM/AM radio tuning 63 Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 63 Frequency step setting 63, 130 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 106 Front 5.1-channel system 17 Front display (part names and functions) 10 Front display brightness 123 Front display information 95 Front panel (part names and functions) 8 Front panel door (front panel) 8 Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Function (Setup menu) 123 E Hall in Munich (sound program) 59 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 59 HD Radio™ information 65 HD Radio™ tuning 65 HDMI (Setup menu) 117 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 117 HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 127 HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118 HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 118 HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122 HDMI output selection 54 HDMI signal compatibility 149 Headphones 60 Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 106 ECO (Setup menu) 125 ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 126 Enhancer (Option menu) 98 ENHANCER (sound mode) 62 ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) Error indication (front display) 141 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Setup menu) 116 Extended Surround (Sound, Setup menu) 116 External power amplifier 24 Extra Bass (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98 F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 119 59 G Ground lead 30 H High definition audio HTC Connect 145 149 I In.Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Indicator (part names and functions) 10 Information display (front display) 10 Information menu 126 Information switching (front display) 95 Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105 Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121 INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 123 Input jack assignment 123 Input menu 100 Input Settings (Option menu) 99 Input Trim (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Internal Error (error indication) 141 Internal Error (YPAO error message) 44 Internet radio listening 80 IP Address (Network, Information menu) 127 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 119 iPod charge 70 iPod content playback 70 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 83 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 83 L Language (Setup menu) 126 Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 106 Level (Sound Program menu) 106 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Level (YPAO measurement result) 43 Level Error (YPAO warning message) 45 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 143 Lipsync 143 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 114 LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 59 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 156 Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106 Load (Scene menu) 103 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 143 M MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 120 MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 127 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 119 Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121 Manual Setting (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 50 Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Manual speaker configuration 111 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 64 Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121 Measurement result (YPAO) 43 Media sharing setup 76 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 125 Menu language selection 37 MHL Overloaded (error indication) 141 MHL-compatible mobile device 31 Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 106 Monaural reception (FM radio) 63 Monitor check 130 MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122 Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122 Mono Movie (sound program) 58 MOVIE (sound program category) 58 MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 58 Multi measurement (YPAO) 41 Multi Zone (Information menu) 128 Multi Zone (Setup menu) 121 Multiple room playback 85 Multi-zone 85 Multi-zone output 147 MUSIC (sound program category) 59 Music Video (sound program) 59 Muting 54 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) 34 NAS content playback 77 Network (Information menu) 127 Network (Setup menu) 119 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 34 Network Connection (Network, Information menu) 127 Network Connection (Network, Setup menu) 119 Network information 127 Network Name (Network, Information menu) 127 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 120 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 119 No content (error indication) 141 No device (error indication) 141 No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 44 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 44 No MIC (YPAO error message) 44 No Signal (YPAO error message) 44 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 44 Noisy (YPAO error message) 44 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 O Option menu 96 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 45 Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 45 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 Panorama (Sound Program menu) 107 Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Party mode 91 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 122 PC content playback 77 PIN Code (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 51 Please wait (error indication) 141 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Power management 125 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 124 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 64 Program Service (Radio Data System) 67 Program Type (Radio Data System) 67 Pure Direct 62 PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 62 Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 115 Q Q factor 114 R Radio Data System information 67 Radio Data System tuning 67 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 67 Rear panel (part names and functions) 11 RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 141 REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129 Remote control (part names and functions) 13 Remote control ID setting 129 Remote control sensor setting 129 Remote ID (System, Information menu) 128 Remote Off (error indication) 141 REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129 Rename (input name) 101 Rename (network name) 120 Rename (scene name) 104 Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 101 Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 104 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 72 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 75 Reset (Scene menu) 104 Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 116 Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 106 Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 106 Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 106 Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 43 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 59 Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 157 S Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 127 Save (Scene menu) 102 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 44 Scene configuration 56 SCENE function 55 SCENE link playback 56 Scene menu 102 Sci-Fi (sound program) 58 Security (Network, Information menu) 127 Security Key (Network, Information menu) 127 Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 111 Setup menu 108 Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 47 Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 123 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 72 Shuffle (PC/NAS, Option menu) 79 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 75 Signal information 127 SILENT CINEMA 60 Simple play (iPod) 72 Single measurement (YPAO) 40 Size (YPAO measurement result) 43 Sleep timer 13 Sleep timer (Zone2) 91 Sound (Setup menu) 114 Sound field effect 58 Sound mode selection 57 Sound program 58, 59 Sound Program menu 104 Speaker (Setup menu) 111 SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 129 Speaker impedance 15 Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 128 Speaker impedance setting 18, 129 Speaker placement 16 Spectacle (sound program) 58 Sports (sound program) 59 SSID 144 SSID (Network, Information menu) 127 Standard (sound program) 58 Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 118 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 118 Station Info (HD Radio™) 65 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 64 STEREO (sound program subcategory) 59 Stereo reception (FM radio) 63 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 61 Straight decode 61 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 119 Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 127 Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 113 Subwoofer Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98 Subwoofer/Bass (Option menu) 98 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 61 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 112 Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105 Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106 Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105 Surround decoder 61 Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 105 Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 106 Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 105 SW.Trim (Subwoofer/Bass, Option menu) 98 System (Information menu) 128 System ID (System, Information menu) 128 T Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124 Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 114 The Bottom Line (sound program) 59 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 59 Tone Control (Option menu) 97 TP (Traffic Program) 68 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 68 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 68 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 97 Trigger function 36 Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 124 Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 124 Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 124 TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 Tuner Frq. Step (System, Information menu) 128 TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 117 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 130 TV Format (System, Information menu) 128 U Unable to play (error indication) 141 USB Overloaded (error indication) 141 USB storage device content playback 73 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 44 V V.Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 131 Version error (error indication) 141 Video (Setup menu) 116 Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 116 Video Out (Input Settings, Option menu) 99 Video Process. (Option menu) 99 Video Processing (Option menu) 99 Video Signal (Information menu) 127 Video signal flow 146 Video signal type setting 130 Virtual CINEMA DSP 60 Virtual CINEMA FRONT 60 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7 Voltage selection 36 Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 121 Volume Interlock (Input menu) 101 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7 W Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) Web control 92 Wi-Fi 144 APPENDIX 123 ➤ Index En 158 Wired (Network Connection, Setup menu) 119 Wired/Wireless (Network, Information menu) 127 Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Network Connection, Setup menu) 47, 119 Wireless Direct (Network Connection, Setup menu) 52, 119 Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 43 WPS 144 WPS Button (Wireless (Wi-Fi), Setup menu) 49 WPS button configuration 48 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 38 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO error message 44 YPAO microphone 38 YPAO Vol. (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 YPAO Volume (Option menu) 97 YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume, Option menu) 97 YPAO warning message 45 38 Z Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 121 Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122 Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 122 Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 121 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 159 © 2014 Yamaha Corporation YG258C0/EN
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126
  • Page 127 127
  • Page 128 128
  • Page 129 129
  • Page 130 130
  • Page 131 131
  • Page 132 132
  • Page 133 133
  • Page 134 134
  • Page 135 135
  • Page 136 136
  • Page 137 137
  • Page 138 138
  • Page 139 139
  • Page 140 140
  • Page 141 141
  • Page 142 142
  • Page 143 143
  • Page 144 144
  • Page 145 145
  • Page 146 146
  • Page 147 147
  • Page 148 148
  • Page 149 149
  • Page 150 150
  • Page 151 151
  • Page 152 152
  • Page 153 153
  • Page 154 154
  • Page 155 155
  • Page 156 156
  • Page 157 157
  • Page 158 158
  • Page 159 159
  • Page 160 160

Yamaha RX-A1040 El manual del propietario

Categoría
Receptores AV
Tipo
El manual del propietario